Home

Tally Genicom Matrix Printer User's Manual

1. B 18 Character Sets All rights reserved Translations reprinting or copying by any means of this manual complete or in part or in any different form requires our explicit approval We reserve the right to make changes to this manual without notice All care has been taken to ensure accuracy of information contained in this manual However we cannot accept responsibility for any errors or damages resulting from errors or inaccuracies of information herein TRADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGES EPSON and EPSON ESC P are registered trademarks and EPSON ESC P 2 is a trademark of SEIKO EPSON Corporation IBM is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation Programmers Reference Tally ANSI MTPL Emulation Table of Contents Description of MTPL Sequences Introduction a so gos ra aa ia a A ea RU 2 Paper and Text Formatting llle 5 Form Length x 2 em a a e Ed ia pe X tac LEGE 5 Turn ON Positioning Unit Mode SM 7 Turn OFF Positioning Unit Mode RM 7 Select Size Unit SSU o o 8 Set Top and Bottom Margin o e 9 Clear Top and Bottom Margin o o 9 Set Left and Right Margin o e 11 Clear Left and Right Margin 0 e 11 Set Line Home SLH e ee eee 13 Set
2. B 6 Character Sets Standard Character Set extended Character Sets B 7 Graphics Character Set extended B 8 Character Sets International Code Table Character Sets B 9 International Code Table extended B 10 Character Sets Table of Character Width for Proportional Printing On the following pages you will find tables of character widths for proportional printing The characters are represented by the printout the decimal and the hexadecimal value Characters without decimal and hexadecimal codes are international characters or graphics Please note the International Substitution Characters on pages B 3 and B 4 and the International Code Tables on page B 8 and B 9 The international characters can be selected via the sequences ESC R and ESC t see Description of Sequences Please note the following for the different types of printers J The values of the character widths are units of 1420 inch For example The value in the field for character width is 12 that means the width of the character
3. Control Function Description sO s ESC TO ESC 1t Non rotatable Oversized rotatable O versizad ESC 2t MID ERE ESC 0 Exit _ Exit Oversized ESCIp1 Set Oversized Oversized Control Functions Commands Description SO ACTIVATE OVERSIZED EXPANDED BAR CODE Dec 14 Hex OE SI EXIT OVERSIZED EXPANDED BAR CODE Dec 15 Hex OF ESC Ot CANCEL OVERSIZED EXPANDED BAR CODE Cancels oversized whether set with ESC 1t or ESC Ps and also expanded and bar code modes This command does not clear the oversized dimensions set by ESC Pv Ph lt sp gt B Dec 279148116 Hex 1B 5B 30 74 ESC 1t NON ROTATABLE OVERSIZED Included for compatibility with older products Use if you want to toggle oversized with SHIFT OUT and SHIFT IN Dec 279149116 Hex 1B 5B 31 74 ESC 2t EXPANDED PRINTING Selects expanded as opposed to the oversized printing at the current expansion factor Dec 27 91 50 116 Hex 1B 5B 32 74 7265 Programmer s Manual 64 Copyright 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 4 ANSI Oversized Commands Description ESC Pv Ph lt sp gt B SET CHARACTER SIZE Sets the expansion of oversized characters in percentage points Pv is the vertical expansion and Ph is the horizontal expansion The parent font is a 10 point font Dimensions established by this sequence are stored in nonvolatile RAM while power is off Caution Any text b
4. B 3 International Substitution Table normal font B 4 International Substitution Table italic font B 5 Graphics Character Set ee eee B 6 Standard Character Set extended B 7 Graphics Character Set extended B 8 International Character Set B 9 International Character Set extended B 10 Table of Character Width for Proportional Printing B 11 Index Description of Sequences Introduction Paper and Text Formatting Character Spacing Line Spacing Character Styling Print Positioning Graphics Download Character Generator Miscellaneous Control Codes Introduction This User s Manual describes the sum of all EPSON Escape sequences regardless of the specific EPSON emulation used by your printer The only differentiation is made be tween 9 and 24 needle printers as well as the maximum possible paper width of 8 inches 80 column printer or 13 6 inches 136 column printer Please note that the print quality LQ Letter Quality is only available in the 24 needle printer Please be sure to observe the notes and steps described in the Operator s Manual as well as the specific EPSON emulations implemented in your printer and which of the described sequences are thus not available for that specific emulation Select the EPSON mode as described in the Operator s Manual Selectin
5. and the space character Start Stop characters Yes Center character code None NULL character Yes Characters per symbol Variable Check digit None 3 4 5 6 Intercharacter gap None 7 8 9 Delimiters Comma asterisk use in pairs one before the bar code symbol and one following it horizontal tab hp_relative 10 HR characters Currently selected font special HR font special OCR A OCR B font 120 DPI only 11 CPI at default element widths 3 78 12 Combined start stop character length 0 514 72655 Programmer s Manual 49 Copyright 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes EAN 8 Style 5 Bars per character 2 dark bars and 2 light bars Character set O through 9 Start Stop characters 2 dark bars and 1 light bar Center character code Yes NULL character Yes Intercharacter gap None Characters per symbol 8 Check digit The check digit can be supplied by the data source Delimiters Space comma horizontal tab hp relative 10 HR characters without guard bars Currently selected font special HR font special OCR A OCR B font 120 DPI only HR characters with guard bars OCR B font 11 CPI at default element widths 7 385 i J O OI AJ O nm gt c EAN 13 Style 6 Bars per character 2 dark bars and 2 light bars Character set O through 9 Start Stop characters 2 dark bars and 1
6. yellow black ribbon black ribbon black black black black red red red red green green green een yellow yellow green er blue blue blue MR magenta magenta red red cyan cyan blue Phe RK the red is made from yellow magenta the green is made from yellow cyan the blue is made from magenta cyan Sequence is ignored Joss print is automatically executed Example 10 REM colour selection 20 LPRINT CHRS 27 r CHRS 5 30 LPRINT this is written with red colour 40 LPRINT CHRS 27 r CHRS 3 50 LPRINT this is written with blue colour 60 END this is written with red colour this is written with blue colour 100 Miscellaneous International Character Sets ESC R Data Structure ASCII ESC R n select international character set hex 1B 52 lt n gt dec 27 82 n Description According to the value specified for n the corresponding international character set can be selected 0 USA 1 France 2 Germany 3 United Kingdom UK 4 Denmark 5 Sweden 6 Italy 7 Spain 8 Japan 9 Norway 10 Denmark II 11 Spain II 12 Latin America 13 Corea 64 Legal For character sets see Appendix B Miscellaneous 101 Example 10 REM i 20 LPRINT CHRS 27 30 LPRINT CHR 27 40 LPRINT CHRS 27 50 LPRINT CHR 27 60 LPRINT CHRS 27 70 LPRINT CHRS 27 80 LPRINT CHRS S 27 90 LPRINT CHR 27 100 LPRINT CHR 27 110 LPRINT CHR 27 120 LPRINT CHR 27
7. Normal matrix field 128 First column is 1 0 Last column is 12 11 Total value of lt A gt 139 Normal matrix field 128 First column is 4 48 Last column is 9 8 Total value of lt A gt 184 86 Download Character Generator Example 10 REM Copy US ASCIT caracter set 20 LPRINT CHR 27 R CHRS 0 30 LPRINT CHR 27 CHR 0 CHR 0 CHRS 0 40 REM Define character into code and 4 code 50 LPRINT CHRS 27 8 CHRS 0 S 60 REM First character without descenter 70 LPRINT CHRS 137 80 LPRINT CHRS 56 CHRS 68 CHRS 146 CHRS 40 90 LPRINT CHRS 130 CHRS 40 CHRS 130 CHRS 68 100 LPRINT CHRS 56 CHRS 0 CHRS 0 110 REM Second character with descender 120 LPRINT CHRS 9 130 LPRINT CHRS 56 CHRS 68 CHRS 146 CHRS 40 140 LPRINT CHRS 130 CHRS 40 CHRS 130 CHRS 68 150 LPRINT CHRS 56 CHRS 0 CHRS 0 160 REM Select Download Character Generator 170 LPRINT CHRS 27 CHRS 1 CHRS 0 180 LPRINT Draft print quality 190 PRINT 200 LPRINT First character without descender 210 LPRINT Second character with descender gt Ssssssssss 220 LPRINT Both characters mixed gt SHSHSHSHS 230 LPRINT LPRINT LPRINT 240 LPRINT CHR 27 p1 250 LPRINT Proportional mode 260 LPRINT 270
8. T 70 LPRINT is on The lines are filled wi 80 LPRINT until they are long enough to 90 LPRINT right margin 100 L 110 L 120 LPRINT justificated on the 130 LPRINT right margin 140 LPRINT L m L L E reach the PRINT CHRS 27 a CHRS 2 These lines are only CHRS 27 a CHRS 0 Now the default setting 150 LPRINT 160 LPRINT is selected again The lines are 170 LPRINT justified on the left margin 180 END CENTERED HEADLINE Now the right and the Left justification is on The Lines are filled with blanks until they are Long enough to reach the right margin These Lines are only justificated on the right margin Now the default setting is selected again The Lines are justified on the Left margin Paper and Text Formatting 15 Character Spacing Set HMI Horizontal Motion Index ESC c Data Structure ASCII ESC c nj ng set HMI Horizontal Motion Index hex 1B 63 nj ng dec 27 99 nj lt ny gt Description Valid values 0 lt nu lt 4 O lt n lt 255 0 lt n x 256 n x 1080 HMI x 3 00 inches The normal print density is enlarged according this formula ny Xx 256 n HMI 860 inch HMI x 360 ny INT 5c HMI x 360 n MOD 256 16 Character Spacing This sequence terminates previously set additional character space defined with ESC SP Following sequences will cancel the HMI mode ESC print mode selec
9. Figures n Check Start code Separation Stop code Number c code ASCII o to g Calculation n m un see section hex 30 to 39 Check Number 3A 3A 3A dec 48 to 57 Calculation 58 58 58 ASCII DC4 Startcode nnnnnnn Separation code nnnnnc Stop code DC4 hex 14 Startcode nnnnnnn Separation code nnnnnc Stopcode 14 dec 20 Startcode nnnnnnn Separation code nnnnnc Stopcode 20 10 REM code EAN 13 without HRI 20 LPRINT CHR 27 11 30 LPRINT CHR 26 L3 111 CHR 25 40 LPRINT CHR 20 0123456 789012 CHRS 20 50 LPRINT CHR 27 10 24 Barcode Printing Code MSI modified Plessey Type M Syntax Data Structure Example Figures n Start code Stop code ASCII o to 9 enn UE hex 30 to 39 3A 3B dec 48 to 57 58 59 ASCII DC4 Startcode n n Stopcode DC4 hex 14 Startcode n n Stopcode 14 dec 20 Startcode n n Stopcode 20 10 REM code MSI plessey modified 20 LPRINT CHR 27 11 30 LPRINT CHR 26 M3 111 CHRS 25 40 LPRINT CHR 20 0123 CHR 20 50 LPRINT CHR 27 10 Barcode Printing 25 Code UPC A with HRI Type N Syntax Figures n Check Start code Separation Stop code Number c code ASCII o to g Calculation n m Walt see section hex 30 to 39 Check Number 3A 3A 3A dec 48 to 57 Calculation 58 58 58 Data Structure ASCII DC4 Start code nnnnnn Separation code nnnnnc Stop code DC4
10. Syntax Figures n Check Start code Separation Stop code Number c code ASCII o to g Calculation n m Walt see section hex 30 to 39 Check Number 3A 3A 3A dec 48 to 57 Calculation 58 58 58 Data Structure ASCII DC4 Start code nnnn Separation code nnnc Stop code DC4 hex 14 Startcode nnnn Separation code nnnc Stop code 14 dec 20 Startcode nnnn Separation code nnnc Stop code 20 Example 10 REM code EAN 8 without HRI 20 LPRINT CHR 27 211 30 LPRINT CHR 26 13 111 CHRS 25 40 LPRINT CHRS 20 0123 4567 CHR 20 50 LPRINT CHR 27 10 TA 22 Barcode Printing Code EAN 13 with HRI Type K Syntax Data Structure Example Figures n Check Start code Separation Stop code Number c code ASCII o to g Calculation n m un see section hex 30 to 39 Check Number 3A 3A 3A dec 48 to 57 Calculation 58 58 58 ASCII DC4 Startcode nnnnnnn Separation code nnnnnc Stop code DC4 hex 14 Startcode nnnnnnn Separation code nnnnnc Stopcode 14 dec 20 Startcode nnnnnnn Separation code nnnnnc Stopcode 20 10 REM code EAN 13 with HRI 20 LPRINT CHR 27 11 30 LPRINT CHR 26 K3 111 CHR 25 40 LPRINT CHR 20 0123456 789012 CHRS 20 50 LPRINT CHR 27 10 A 123456 7 89 012 Barcode Printing 23 Code EAN 13 without HRI Type L Syntax Data Structure Example
11. 0 o 00000 49 control code NAK Negative Acknowledge 95 control code NEL Next Line 0 o 64 control code NUL fill character 94 control code PLD Partial Line Down 63 control code PLU Partial Line Up rss 63 control code RI Reverse Index 220020005 64 single shift 3 SSB 86 single Shift 2 S82 86 control code STX Start of Text Block 94 control code VT Vertical Tab Stop o 50 control Code MTS ica Sede fied ats de vii ds he ded d 51 Summary of Possible Codes A 7 Sorted by Functions Function acoustic alarm additional character spacing automatic gap adjustment OFF automatic gap adjustment ON Basic Measuring Unit BMU bin 1 front bin 2 rear bin 3 option bold or increased intensity centering ON change color character spacing clear all horizontal tab stops clear all horizontal tab stops at current line clear all selected fonts clear all vertical tab stops clear all vertical tab stops clear horizontal tab stop at current position color black color blue color cyan blue color green color magenta red color red color white color yellow control code ACK Positive Acknowledge control code BS Backspace control code CAN Cancel control code CR Carriage Return contr
12. 30 20 18 12 30 20 30 20 30 20 36 24 36 24 18 12 24 16 24 16 30 20 30 20 18 12 30 20 18 12 30 20 30 20 30 20 30 20 30 20 30 20 30 20 30 20 30 20 30 20 30 20 18 12 18 12 30 20 30 20 30 20 30 20 36 24 36 24 36 24 42 28 36 24 36 24 30 20 24 16 30 20 36 24 24 16 36 24 30 20 36 24 30 20 36 24 18 12 36 24 30 20 36 24 36 24 36 24 30 20 24 16 36 24 30 20 30 20 36 24 24 16 36 24 36 24 42 28 36 24 36 24 18 12 36 24 24 16 36 24 36 24 36 24 18 12 36 24 42 28 36 24 36 24 36 24 30 20 42 28 36 24 I A c mn NKNXS lt zl COMHAIHDUARWNHE ONS cHumugouozztutumamnumuqo usnuunum mmsv vw OD 8 rnmwu mnb 5muarnonunososo6nf oo Character Sets B 13 Width Width Width in 1 360 in 1 360 in 1 360 36 24 30 20 30 20 24 16 36 24 36 24 42 28 30 20 36 24 30 20 24 26 18 12 24 16 30 20 36 24 36 24 30 20 30 20 30 20 30 20 30 20 30 20 30 20 30 20 30 20 18 12 18 12 18 12 30 20 36 24 30 20 36 24 30 20 36 24 30 20 42 28 30 20 42 28 30 20 30 20 30 20 30 20 30 20 30 20 30 36 24 30 36 24 30 36 24 30 36 24 30 42 28 30 30 20 30 30 20 30 36 24 30 42 28 30 30 20 30 30 20 30 18 12 30 30 20 30 36 24 30 36 24 30 36 24 30 30 20 30 30 20 30 P Nix ES Ct Nara u pi e Zh D O E D S PP Hi m O0 Ci OK C O O O B B Eh D o e E E y OO Me pp M M C lo b r eke
13. Intercharacter gap None Characters per symbol 10 CO NI o Oo A GW N Check digit Automatically generated by the printer and used to check parity It is not encoded in the bar code symbol c Delimiters Space comma horizontal tab hp relative HR characters without guard bars Currently selected font special HR font special OCR A OCR B font 120 DPI only HR characters with guard bars OCR B font 11 CPI at default element widths 7 2 7265 Programmer s Manual Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom 53 Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes Code 93 Style 15 Bars per character 3 dark bars and 3 light bars Character set All 128 ASCII characters Start Stop characters Yes Stop character has 4 dark bars and 3 light bars Center character code None NULL character Yes Intercharacter gap No Characters per symbol Variable Check digit Always required Must be generated by data source See page 58 Delimiters Horizontal tab When no tabs are defined a space is inserted hp_relative HR characters Currently selected font special HR font special OCR A OCR B font 120 DPI only 11 CPI at default element widths 6 85 12 Combined start stop character length 0 333 o NI O oF A l N gt o Code 128 Style 16 1 Bars per character 3 dark bars and 3 light bars 2 Character set Any of 3 subsets The printer automati
14. 56 Vertical Position Absolute VPA o 0005 57 Vertical Position Relative VPR 0 o 58 Vertical Position Backward VPB 59 Horizontal and Vertical Position Absolute HVP 60 Backspace er e ns a e A ag 61 Carriage Return o ee 61 Form Feed vaca e A a A Re Es 62 Partial Line DOWN e ee 63 Partial Eine Up i 3 ve Ra ad RES a a eg 63 Reverselndex 22e 64 Next EIme 325 das aie UR carck se he ea ET X SOEUR tdo AS 64 Graphics ux bed pe ud A EB een mare mg Suet tn dA 65 Graphic Modes 0 0000 eee EAE Dy 65 Miscellaneous cs 69 Load Menu botica AV RR aeu a tutt ritur an MSG 69 Automatic Gap Adjustment AGA llle 70 Direct Setting of the Print Head Distance 70 Paper Handling o us ica cala a AUR Run E dS RE ce S es 71 Shared Interface 74 4 71 Color Selection Option llle 72 Input Data Control o o ee 74 Sheet Feeder Paperway a a 76 EJect FOFTTE a 2 fuze ete nee e ree Fake Mod po a 76 Reset to Initial State RIS llle 79 Gommand Set i vb ea E4RE Xue e es 80 Activation of Character Sets 0 81 Designation of Character Set GO 83 Designation of Character Set G1 83 Designation of Character Set G2
15. with proportional spacing selected this change only becomes effective when the printer leaves the proportional mode Character Spacing 21 Example 10 REM single character densities 20 LPRINT CHRS 27 50 END P this is pica sized 30 LPRINT CHRS 27 40 LPRINT CHRS 27 M and this is elite sized g and this is 15 cpi this is pica sized and this is elite sized and this is 15 cpi 22 Character Spacing Proportional Spacing ESC p Data Structure ASCII ESC p lt n gt orn proportional spacing ON OFF hex 1B 70 lt n gt orn dec 27 112 lt n gt orn Description If 1 is specified for n proportional spacing is ON if 0 is specified for n proportional spacing is OFF When in default font type all characters are assigned a fixed equally wide space When in proportional spacing the spaces between each character are set to the actual width of the characters on account of these proportional characters reading of the text becomes more easy Proportional spacing selects automatically LQ as print quality Condensed is reset The set character densities are only effective again when proportional spacing is switched off Example 10 REM proportional spacing 20 LPRINT CHRS 27 p CHRS 1 30 LPRINT This is proportional spacing 40 LPRINT CHRS 27 p CHR 0 50 LPRINT This is normal spacing 60 END This is proportional spacing This is normal spacing Character Spacing 23 Charact
16. 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 35 36 38 39 39 40 40 41 42 43 43 45 Appendix Character Sets LCP Character Set German LCP Character Set US ASCII OCR A Character Set OCR B Character Set A 3 A 4 A 5 A 6 Barcode and LCP Printing Introduction Secured Unsecured Mode Barcode Printing US Postnet Barcode Large Character Printing LCP Introduction 2 Introduction This User s Manual describes all barcode and LCP sequences and control codes regard less of your printer s special barcode and LCP implementation LCP Large Character Printing Be sure to observe the notes in the operator s manual regarding the special barcode LCP Types implemented in your printer and which of the sequences described here are not available as a result Select the Barcode Mode as described in the operator s manual Selecting this emulation mode automatically selects the corresponding character set To print barcode or LCP characters the following steps must be carried out in most cases Activate barcode Activate secured unsecured mode see section Secured Unsecured Mode Transfer barcode and or LCP header see sections Barcode Header and LCP Header Calculate check number barcode only see section Calculate Check Number Transfer barcode and or LCP data see sections Barcode Typees and LCP Header Deactivate barcode if necessary The fo
17. Data Sructure Description ASCII CSI n t A set form lenght in lines hex 9B n 74 dec 155 n 116 PUM turned OFF n 1 132 lines at a line spacing of t 6 inch 6 Ipi 1 176 lines at a line spacing of 1 inch 8 Ipi This MTPL sequence sets the form length to n times the current line feed pitch in in ches Also the current print position is simultaneously defined as top of form The value specified for n must be in the range 1 to 255 This value is multiplied by the cur rent line feed pitch to obtain the form length For example if 60 is specified for n and the current line feed is 1 inch the form length is set to 10 inches Once set by this sequence the form length is not affected by changing the line spacing PUM turned ON The unit for n is either the decipoint or defined by the SSU function Select Size Unit see page 8 n 0 Reset form lenght to default value print menu setting Paper and Text Formatting 5 Example 10 REM form length 20 LPRINT CHR 27 4t 30 FOR F 1 TO 2 40 FOR L 1 TO 3 50 LPRINT length 4 form F line L 60 NEXT L LPRINT CHR 12 NEXT F 70 LPRINT 80 LPRINT CHR 27 3t 90 FOR F 1 TO 3 100 FOR L 1 TO 2 110 LPRINT length 3 form F line L 120 NEXT L LPRINT CHR 12 NEXT F 130 END Length 4 form 1 Line 1 Length 4 form 1 Line 2 Length 4 form 1 Line 3 Length 4 form 2 Line Length 4 form 2 Line Length 4 form 2 Line F CN Length 3 form 1 Line 1 Length 3
18. For n the following parameters are available n2 hex dec identification 0 30 48 Roman 1 31 49 Sans Serif 2 32 50 Courier 3 33 51 Prestige 4 34 52 Script 5 35 53 OCRB 6 36 54 OCRA 7 37 55 Modern 8 38 56 Kaufmann 9 39 57 Gothic 10 31 30 49 48 Swiss 11 31 31 49 49 Quadrato 66 36 36 54 54 Courier IBM The first parameter n4 selects one of ten font registers to which the second parameter n gt designates one font of the whole repertory in the device With the sequence CSI 1 m the designated font can be selected see page 33 Select Typestyle n4 is in the range of zero to nine and selects primary font first alternate font etc up to the nineth alternate font The second parameter n5 is defined by your printer type and represents an identification of the desired font Character Styling 43 o Font attributes e g bold can be specified after designation through corresponding ESC sequences Technical Details The use of the font designation code CSIn4 nospace D needs further explanation Note Font Designation CSI is 9B you can use ESC 1B 5BH instead if you wish Codes The parameter n Register to use This paramer can take values of 0 to 9 The default allocation of fonts to these registers is given in the printer s manual The parameter nz What to put in the register This parameter is held as a 16 bit number in the printer It is made up as below The lower eight bits 0 to 255 These encode the
19. Table 865 DOS Norway Table 866 Standard DOS Cyrillic Table 866 Ukraine Table 866 Kazakhstan Kamenicky combination of table 437 and 852 Mazovia code page 437 with polish characters ASCII Microsoft Windows Codepage 1250 Latin 2 ASCII Microsoft Windows Codepage 1251 Cyrillic ASCII Microsoft Windows Codepage 1252 Latin 1 ASCII ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 ASCII ISO 8859 2 Latin 2 ASCII ISO 8859 5 Latin Cyrillic ASCII Cro ASCII character set Codepage 437 with croatic characters Other character sets may be available on request If the mode is selected by the printer menu the MTPL character set US ASCII is active default configuration The slashed zero as well as the IBM and Epson character sets can only be selected via the printer control panel p By default the graphic character set GO is automatically activated This functions do not deal with printing styles like Italic Helvetica or Courier Instead they select character sets defined by the meaning of their symbols The meaning of the sets may be Greek or French character sets or things like math symbols and line drawing characters The available character sets may vary due to used printer type 84 Miscellaneous Example 10 REM 20 LPRINT 30 LPRINT 40 LPRINT 50 LPRINT 60 LPRINT 70 LPRINT 80 LPRINT 90 LPRINT 100 LPRINT 110 LPRINT 120 END 130 LPRINT 140 LPRINT 150 LPRINT 160 LPRINT 170 RETURN
20. The value specified for n must be an integer in the range of 1 to 22 otherwise the se quence will be ignored This code sequence resets the perforation skip function ESC N Paper and Text Formatting 5 Example 10 REM form 20 FFS CHRS 12 30 K 1 length 40 LPRINT CHRS 27 C CHRS 4 50 FOR F 1 60 FOR L 1 70 LPRINT 80 NEXT L 90 K K 1 100 LPRINT 110 NEXT F 120 K 1 130 LPRINT 160 LPRINT 170 NEXT L 180 K K 1 190 LPRINT 200 NEXT F 210 END length 4 length 4 length 4 length 4 length 4 length 4 length 3 length 3 length 3 length length length Yuu 6 Paper and Text Formatting 140 FOR F 1 150 FOR L 1 TO 3 TO K length 4 form F line L FFS CHRS 27 C CHRS 3 TQ 3 TO K length 3 form F line L FFS form 1 line 1 form 2 line 1 form 2 line 2 form 3 line 1 form 3 line 2 form 3 line 3 form 1 line 1 form 2 line 1 form 2 line 2 form 3 line 1 form 3 line 2 form 3 line 3 Set Page Length in Units ESC C Data Structure ASCII ESC C lt n gt lt ny gt lt m_ gt lt my gt set page length in units hex 1B 28 43 nj ny lt m_ gt lt my gt dec 27 40 067 nj ny lt m_ gt lt my gt Description Valid values nL 2 np 0 0 lt my x 256 m x defined unit x 22 Defines page length in untis previously defined with the sequence ESC U see page 62 page length my x 256 m
21. c 0 Normal mode not compressed c 1 Data Length Encoding DLE compressed V Vertical resolution in dpi 360 180 dpi h Horizontal resolution in dpi 360 180 dpi m Vertical dot count rows of dot graphics n ny Horizontal dot count columns of dot graphics Calculating algorithm 1 horizontal dot count 256 ny IN horizontal dot count n MOD 256 x Total number of data bytes ny X 256 n 7 8 x mx INT d During normal mode c 0 Graphics data dy dy d During DLE c 1 The first data byte is treated as a counter Graphics data bytes then alternate with a data counter byte 0 lt counter byte x 127 Download Character Generator 77 a Counter specifies the number of data bytes following counter byte 1 number of data bytes to follow or counter byte number of data bytes to follow 1 128 lt counter byte lt 255 b Counter specifies the number of times to repeat the next byte of data 256 counter byte 1 number of times to repeat next byte counter byte 257 number of times to repeat next byte Data which will exceed the right margin are discarded The vertical movement cannot be defined smaller than the current print density density must not be changed within Graphics Mode Avoid moving the print position upwards while in Graphics Mode o This sequence is valid only in Graphics Mode ESC G see page 67 After printing raster graph
22. 25 CHRS 20 ABCDO123 CHRS 20 CHRS 27 210 Jl EAN 128 Type T Syntax Data Structure Description Example Figures Characters n Start code Stop code ASCII hex see Code 128 none none dec ASCII DC4 n n DC4 hex 14 n n 14 dec 20 n n 20 The only difference between both types of barcodes is the initial sequence Code 128 starts with Code A Code B or Code C followed by character information Barcode EAN 128 requires the code FNC1 between Startcode and character information The Code 128 translation table remains valid The checksum of EAN 128 is calculated using Code 128 algorythm 10 LPRINT CHR 20 LPRINT CHR 30 LPRINT CHR 40 LPRINT CHR en 211 TEA CARS LO 1234ABCD CHR 20 210 NO NONO PO OO JJ Se Se Barcode Printing 35 Add On UPC and EAN barcodes commercial barcodes can be extended with Add On barcodes Barcodes The following barcodes can be extended with Add On barcodes Barcode Types H I K L N O P and Q In the data formats the numbers are generally given in the sequence they are printed from left to right in the barcode i e in the case of the EAN13 code the 13 figure is trans ferred first and the 1 figure last For the formats for the Add On barcodes the printer ex pects the check number as the first figure This is not printed in the barcode The follo wing numbers 2 or 5 are printed from left to right in Ad
23. 88 CHR 72 70 LPRINT CHR 68 CHRS 66 CHRS 65 80 NEXT K 90 LPRINT er lf 100 NEXT N 110 LPRINT CHR 27 CHRS 92 end graphics 120 LPRINT FINISHED Figure 2 6 Dot Graphics Example 7265 Programmer s Manual 30 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 2 ANSI Graphics Control Functions The set of control codes that are interpreted while in graphics mode are shown in the following charts Bytes less than 32 decimal that are not interpreted as control codes are ignored The printer processes valid escape sequences within a graphics data sequence This is potentially useful for instance in the cases of the absolute and relative position commands A valid escape sequence that is not applicable to graphics mode such as bold printing mode will be implemented for text on exiting graphics If the printer receives a nonvalid escape sequence while in graphics mode then it drops out of graphics mode Commands Description BEL BELL Causes the beeper to sound for about 1 2 second Dec 7 Hex 07 HT HORIZONTAL TAB Causes the print head to move to the next tab stop Dec 9 Hex 09 LF NEL LINE FEED Graphics next line Causes printing to move to the left margin on the following line If 8 bit control code processing is enabled then NExt Line does the same thing Dec 10 or 133 Hex OA or 85 VT VERTICAL TAB Causes printing to move to the left margin at the next vertical tab stop De
24. CHRS 25 1 This text is on a form from magazine one CHRS 12 REM form feed CHRS 27 CHRS 25 2 This text is on a form from magazine two This text is on a form from magazine one This text is on a form from magazine two Miscellaneous 109 Print Code Area Expansion ON Print Code Area Expansion OFF Data Structure ASCII ESC 6 print ASCII codes 128 to 159 and 255 o hex 1B 36 dec 27 54 ASCII ESC 7 suppress ASCII codes 128 to 159 and 255 o hex 1B 37 dec 27 55 Description O This code sequence causes the printout of the higher control codes ASCII 128 to 159 and 255 in the form of characters and symbols instead of the repetition of the functi ons of ASCII codes 0 to 31 and 127 For this function the Graphic character set must be selected by ESC t 1 or by menu see IBM Character Set 2 from hex 80 to hex 9F O When the printer receives this code sequence the ASCII codes 128 to 159 and 255 are used as duplicates of the functions of the lower control codes O to 31 and 127 For character sets see Appendix B 110 Miscellaneous Example 10 REM code aera expansion 15 LPRINT CHR 27 t1 20 LPRINT CHRS 27 6 30 GOSUB 70 40 LPRINT CHR 27 7 50 GOSUB 70 60 END 70 RESTORE 80 FOR I 1 TO 12 90 READ D 100 LPRINT CHRS D 110 NEXT I 120 LPRINT 130 RETURN 140 DATA 65 66 67 68 69 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 ABCDECU aaaa ABCDE Miscellaneous 111
25. LCP Data Before you can transfer the LCP data Large Character Printing data to the printer the LCP header must be sent The LCP header is made up of a series of max 5 characters In the header the printing parameters and the LCP character size are defined This hea der only needs to be transferred once unless settings are to be changed or the printer has been turned off Format DLE n EM optional does not need to be transmitted Character meaning DLE hex 10 dec 16 start character ASCII bidirectional printing if transferred n ASCII n 2 99 enlargement factor EM hex 19 dec 25 end character with the help of the header the enlargement factor is fixed to the original size A character in LCP mode with the size n occupies a horizontal space for n normal character depending on the selected character distance At a character distance of 10 characters inch and an enlargement factor of 6 the LCP font width is 6 10 inch The height of a LCP character is n times 1 12 inch It is independent of the selected line spacing The LCP characters are printed so that their lower edges lie flush with the next available ground line The result is that only the upper edges of characters with an un even enlargement factor can lie flush with the line The existence of a LCP header does not mean that all subsequent characters are printed in LCP size The LCP mode must be begun and it must end with the LCP brackets SI hex OF
26. 1 chr 27 K 1 chr 27 o 1 0a t2 Example Locking Shift Are Printed Are Printed Designate G3 French Substitution Table Locking Shift 3 French Substitutes Designate G3 German Substitution Table Locking Shift 3 German Substitutes Designation of Character Set GO ESC Designation of Character Set G1 ESC Designation of Character Set G2 ESC Designation of Character Set G3 ESC Data Structure ASCII ESC n F designation of character sets hex 1B n F dec 27 n F Description Designation of character sets is a process by which a set of graphic symbols is con nected to the usable character set registers GO G1 G2 and G3 For n and F the following parameters are available hex dec character set 40 A GO 29 41 A Gi 2A 42 B G2 2B 43 B G3 hex dec character set 41 65 US ASCII 42 66 UK ASCII 48 72 Swedish Finnish German 4C 76 Portuguese 52 82 French 59 89 Italian 5A 90 Spanish 60 96 Norwegian 135 N 00 INX lt IFATO gt mMm A UJ M al G 80 128 Table 437 DOS Standard 82 130 Table 850 DOS Europe 87 135 Table 852 DOS Latin 2 a 84 132 Table 860 DOS Portugal Miscellaneous 83 hex dec character set F a 85 133 86 134 A 8E 142 8F 143 90 144 e 91 145 E 92 146 p 70 112 q 71 113 r 72 114 25 37 amp 26 38 2A 42 lt 3C 60 Table 863 DOS French Canadian
27. 130 LPRINT CHRS 27 140 LPRINT CHR 27 150 END 160 LPRINT CHRS 35 170 LPRINT CHR 92 180 LPRINT CHR 123 190 RETURN ASCII FRANCE GERMANY UK DENMARK SWEDEN ITALY SPAIN JAPAN NORWAY DENMARK 11 SPAIN 11 LATIN AMERICA 102 Miscellaneous nternational D UN sets R CHRS 7 ASCII eR CN D FRANCE R CHRS 2 GERMANY R CARS 3 UK R CHRS 4 DENMARK I R CHRS 5 SWEDEN R CHRS 6 ITALY R CHRS 7 SPAIN I R CHRS 8 JAPAN R CHRS 9 NORWAY R CHRS 10 DENMARK II R CHRS 11 SPAIN II R CHRS 12 LATIN AMERICA CHRS 36 CHRS CHRS 91 CHR 93 CHR 94 CHRS 96 CSS 124 COBRE 135 py 126 H 9LN2 C127 t cS e H 5AO00 o G 9 N1 127 HSCAOA xoa HH EADGAUEaO AU HS E HAGET R e NG AI HS C I 137 teEAOAU ERO AL HSEACAUEROAU H S aj Nee HSa cui d GOSUB 1 GOSUB 1 GOSUB 1 GOSUB 1 GOSUB 1 GOSUB 1 GOSUB 1 GOSUB 1 GOSUB 1 GOSUB 1 GOSUB 1 GOSUB 1 GOSUB 1 Character Sets ESCt Data Structure ASCII ESC t di select character table hex 1B 74 di dec 27 116 di Description Valid values 0 lt d4 3 48x d 51 By means of this code sequence the upper half of character code table dec 128 to dec 255 can be selected default Description d Oor48 Character table 0 italic The Epson Standard Character Set is
28. 1B 50 4C 53 30 32 1B 5C dec 27 80 76 83 48 50 27 92 Large Character Printing LCP 45 Various Examples Example 1 Example for different LCP character sizes HE Y E FU FU EN U FU EJ FU YU HU a o ET DJ aes EE EASE ty FU rj E Bu AA z 1H un un 7HO4H0 Hd ct ct pa H JH O ct QQQOQ na aa ana QOO ouo HHO ct c 3456 46 Various Examples R 27 11 RS 27 PSCO CHRS 27 haracter size to 3 RS 16 3 CHERS 25 RS 15 3 CHRS 15 haracter size to 4 RS 16 4 CHRS 25 RS 15 4 CHRS 15 haracter size to 5 RS 16 5 CHERS 25 RS 15 5 CHRS 15 haracter size to 6 RS 16 6 CHRS 25 RS 15 6 CHRS 15 RS 27 210 Example for different LCP character sizes IN Example 2 REM Example 2 for unsecured printing OPEN lptl FOR RANDOM AS 1 WIDTH 1 255 PRINT 1 CHRS 27 11 PRINT 41 CHRS 27 PSCO CHRS 27 N PRINT 1 CHRS 16 5 CHRS 25 PRINT 1 Example for PRINT 1 CHR 15 LCP CHR 15 unsecured mode PRINT 1 CHRS 10 CHR 13 END Example for L CI unsecured mode Example 3 RE Example 3 for secured printing OPEN pt1 FOR RANDOM AS 1 WIDTH 1 255 PRINT 1 CHRS 27 11 PRINT 1 CHR 27 PSC1 CHR 27 PRINT 1 CHRS 16
29. 29 nno a a E A a Aree ets AE A ees 33 TOME Dies A45 A A AA AA 33 TORE Geiss td ds 2 a aa bp ue dete ee hh atid ee eom ud 33 TORTE S m s A762 3 ee t dr e at a de da RR Seo 33 TONES Rc a rt e a e ln e a ae 33 TOM Oya a Om ee O Eric ce LA S e eno 33 clear all horizontal tab stops at current line 46 CICCLTONIN ent a ede etd et a LE a e 76 change color x usc ge ke aa be ERE a PR a Y SR dal 72 sizeunitDecipoints 2 2 0 0 e e ee 8 horizontal character spacing 15 cpi ln 18 vertical spacing 3 pPl o o 24 load MmenuNo 2 e 69 low print quality 0 2 e e 31 horizontal spacing 7 5 cpi 0 o ee 16 proportional mode ON yera 2 les 37 double height OFF 0 0 000 eee 29 super sub and microscriptOFF 02 000 27 double underline mode rcs 39 DEOM is A beam S s lle EA 76 normal color or normal intensity cles 72 A ou et rn g EE e en tou ert v oet AM A fos 76 italic mode OFF 2s 36 biri a A OptlOn An aa sd min er ovn RAE ENS 76 underline mode OFF ca doses m TER RAD RU be aE 39 proportional mode ON 2 37 clear all horizontal tab stops o ee ee ee 46 italic mode ON uu ioo e e a o Re ee Sw a a 36 device status report Some malfunction detected 92 size unit DecididOtS rns 8 horizontal
30. 5 CHRS 25 PRINT 1 Example for PRINT 1 CHR 15 LCP CHR 15 PRINT 1 secured CHR 10 mode PRINT 1 STRINGS 5 10 END Example for secured mode P Various Examples 47 Example 4 Unsecured Mode vertical spacing with various enlargement factors ONOORWN e Yt Uu Oo Legend A a single line Feed 1 6 B Factor 6 character heigth 6x45 3x LF C Factor 7 character height 7x5 additional space is added to gain a full Line Feed D Factor 4 character height 4x75 2x4 LF E Factor 5 character height 5x45 additional space is added to gain a full Line Feed A start actual print cursor position end actual print position Description The room will be occupied to fit the highest character in one line Characters which will not meet the 1 6 grid are adding additional space to fill the room to the next possible line this value may change due to actual line density setting 48 Various Examples Appendix Character Sets A 2 Character Sets The following symbol sets are available in the barcode mode The LCP symbol sets can only be selected via Escape sequences The OCR A and OCR B fonts can be selected via control panel or by Escape sequences which corre spond to the selected emulation mode The codes hex A0 up to hex FE correspond to the selected character set The following example shows you how to find the hexadecimal value for a character
31. Activate Deactivate Graphics Characters ESC m Data Structure ASCII ESC m lt n gt hex 1B 6D lt n gt dec 27 109 lt n gt Description On receipt of this command the ASCII codes hex 90 to hex 9F can be output as special graphics characters Valid values for n are n 0 hex 00 activates the control codes n 4 hex 04 activates the graphics characters Activate Deactivate Direct Print Mode ESCi Data Structure ASCII ESC i lt n gt orn hex 1B 69 lt n gt orn dec 27 105 lt n gt orn Description In this mode no complete lines from the print buffer are printed but each character is prin ted immediately on receipt of the character just like in a typewriter In addition the printer pushes the paper up so that the user can immediately see the printed character and then pulls the page down again to continue printing Valid values for n are n 1 dec 1 or dec 49 hex 01 or hex 31 activates the mode n 0 dec 0 or dec 48 hex 00 or hex 30 deactivates the mode 112 Miscellaneous International Code Table ESC Data Structure ASCII ESC I lt n gt orn hex 1B 49 lt n gt orn dec 27 73 lt n gt orn Description The ASCII codes hex 00 to hex 1F dec 0 to dec 31 and hex 80 to hex 9F dec 128 to dec 159 are as a rule assigned with non printable characters These codes can how ever be converted to printable characters using ESC I Valid values for n are either ASCII code hex 00 and hex 01 or ASCII characters 0
32. CHRS 1 180 LPRINT CHRS 0 CHRS 0 CHRS 0 190 LPRINT CHRS 255 CHRS 0 CHRS 1 200 LPRINT CHRS 0 CHRS 128 CHRS 0 210 LPRINT CHRS 0 CHRS 64 CHRS 2 220 LPRINT CHRS 0 CHRS 32 CHRS 4 230 LPRINT CHRS 0 CHRS 16 CHRS 8 240 LPRINT CHRS 0 CHRS 8 CHRS 16 250 LPRINT CHRS 0 CHRS 4 CHRS 0 260 LPRINT CHRS 0 CHRS 0 CHRS 16 270 LPRINT CHRS 0 CHRS 4 CHRS 0 280 LPRINT CHRS 0 CHRS 0 CHRS 16 290 LPRINT CHRS 0 CHRS 4 CHRS 0 300 LPRINT CHRS 0 CHRS 0 CHRS 16 310 LPRINT CHRS 0 CHRS 4 CHRS 0 320 LPRINT CHRS 0 CHRS 0 CHRS 16 330 LPRINT CHRS 0 CHRS 4 CHRS 0 340 LPRINT CHRS 0 CHRS 3 CHRS 240 350 LPRINT CHRS 27 CHRS 1 CHRS 0 360 LPRINT LPRINT 370 LPRINT AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA 380 LPRINT CHRS 27 x0 390 LPRINT CHRS 27 CHRS CHRS 400 LPRINT 410 LPRINT AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA 420 END BEGEBGEEEELECELEEEEG Rranmaaaaaaaaaaaaaman 94 Download Character Generator Miscellaneous Print Data as Characters ESC Data Structure ASCII ESC lt n gt ng lt d1 gt lt dn gt print data as characters hex 1B 28 54 lt n gt lt ny gt lt d1 gt lt dn gt dec 27 40 94 lt n gt ng lt d1 gt lt dn gt Description Valid values 0 lt n lt 255 0 lt ny lt 127 Data bytes d to d are printed as characters rather than contro
33. Emphasized Mode Underline Mode Score Selection Italic Mode Print Mode Selection Double Height Print Positioning Horizontal Tab Stops Set Horizontal and Vertical Pitch Horizontal and Vertical Step Forward Absolute Horizontal Step Relative Horizontal Step Vertical Tab Stops Set Reset Vertical Tabs in Channels Select Vertical Tab Channel Set Absolute Vertical Print Position Set Relative Vertical Print Position Set Unit ica eg Graphics Select Graphics Mode Graphics 60dpi Graphics 120 dpi Graphics 240 dpi Graphic Modes Graphics Mode Reassignment Graphics Printing with 9 Print Dots 29 29 31 32 34 35 37 38 39 40 42 43 46 47 47 49 50 51 53 55 57 57 59 59 62 63 67 63 63 63 63 69 71 Download Character Generator General Copy ROM into RAM 0 0002 0 e Print Raster Graphics 0 e e Activate User Defined Character Set Download Characters e ee ee Draft Character Definition 9 Needle Printer Definition of a Character 9 Needle Printer Attribute A 9 Needle Printer Descenders 9 Needle Printer Proportional Spacin
34. SP X Data Structure Description ASCII hex dec ASCII hex dec CSI y n SP X A select print quality 0 n 20 58 n 32 88 po y select print quality o n 79 n 121 O This sequence defines the print quality Print throughput changes with the print quality For n the following parameters are available printer menu setting is valid n hex dec print quality 0 30 48 A B high 1 31 49 A medium 32 50 A low O With the sequence CSI n y for n the following parameters are available n hex dec typeface 0 30 48 A draft print quality DPQ 1 31 49 A near letter quality NLQ 4 34 52 C NLQ at 10 cpi 5 35 43 C NLQ at 12 cpi 11 31 31 4949 B fast draft print quality 12 3132 4950 A letter print quality LQ e g 24 36 matrix 13 3133 49 51 B high resolution print quality e g 24 48 matrix Character Styling 31 Example 10 REM print quality 20 LPRINT CHR 27 OyThis is draft quality 30 LPRINT CHR 27 1yand this is NL printing 40 LPRINT CHR 27 5yThis is NL with 12 cpi 50 END This is draft quality and this is NLQ printing This is NLQ with 12 cpi 32 Character Styling Select Typestyle CSI m Data Structure Description ASCII CSI n m A select typestyle hex 9B n 6D dec 155 n 109 This sequence defines the typestyle For n the following parameters are available n hex dec typestyle number is printer dependent 10 31 30 49
35. and 1 hex 30 and hex 31 n 1 hex 01 or hex 31 gt Access to user defined or international characters n 0 hex 00 or hex 30 gt Hex 00 to hex 1F and hex 80 to hex 9F assigned with non printable codes For character sets see appendix B Character Sets Miscellaneous 113 Printer Initialization ESC O Data Structure ASCII ESC e printer initialization hex 1B 40 dec 27 64 Description Printer initialization means that the printer is in the same state as it is after switch on All parameters set by means of ESC sequences are cleared o All print data transferred after the last print control code CR LF are lost For this reason first send the respective print control code CR LF and then the ESC sequence Example 10 REM initialization 15 LPRINT CHR 27 1 CHR 10 REM set left margin 20 LPRINT CHR 27 CHR 15 REM set condensed 30 LPRINT CHRS 27 G REM set NLQ 35 LPRINT CHR 27 S1 REM set subscript 40 GOSUB 90 70 LPRINT CHRS 27 0 80 GOSUB 90 90 END 100 LPRINT Matrix Printer 110 LPRINT LPRINT 120 END Matrix Pam dors ct ewe Matrix Printer 114 Miscellaneous Activate Paper End Sensor Deactivate Paper End Sensor Data Structure ASCII ESC 8 Deactivate paper end sensor 11 hex 1B 38 dec 27 56 ASCII ESC 9 Activate paper end sensor o hex 1B 39 dec 27 57 Description O This sequence deactivates the paper end sensor so that a cut sheet can be pri
36. dec 15 All characters inside these brackets are printed as LCP characters The LCP mode is ended by all characters from hex 00 to hex 1F LCP characters can be printed with character densities 10 12 15 17 1 and 20 cpi If there is a LCP line overflow the printing procedure is automatically started All characters which caused the overflow are then printed as normal characters Large Character Printing LCP 43 Refer to the section Secured Unsecured Mode at the front of the Manual for detailed description of the secured unsecured mode Data Structure ASCII SI hex OF dec 15 n n n n n n SI OF 15 n all printable characters gt hex 1F dec 31 Example HU E DT RINI RIN RIN RIN RIN RIN RINI RINI Lr sh sh RE t RO L3 F3 H H3 jedimdnnnuduiiz r iat J F x 255 STRINGS 5 10 Example Character Densities EN Iptl FOR RANDOM AS 1 PATA 4 CHRS 25 6w REM 15CPI LCP CHRS 15 5w REM 12CPI LEP CHRS 15 4w REM 10CPI LCP CHRS 15 LCP LCP LCP 44 Large Character Printing LCP LCP Character Set US ASCII ESCPLS01ESCA LCP Character Set German ESC PLS02 ESC Data Structure ASCII ESC P S O 1 ESO v character set US ASCII hex 1B 50 4C 53 30 31 1B 5C dec 27 80 76 83 48 49 27 92 ASCII ESC P S QU 2 ESO character set german hex
37. e este o B 14 Character Sets Width Width Width in 1 360 in 1 360 in 1 360 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 feat r 1 E less ll H 2mo6 8 00 OA ATQM3HDAR Ma IV Cesa n r FE dl 0 IA x o E H Character Sets B 15 E 9 Needle Printer Character Character Character A we GHNnNDWO VOSA Sr RUVH AQT TAP erv ALAN ARAS oop BrP RWuUke TM hoa DP B 16 Character Sets Character Character Character italic graph italic graph q r s t u v w x y z i Ci Qu C Oo 0 O gp BR U mo RH red Om OO 89 Q9 9 Q ds OM dx re IO IM RRO Ov m Jac Sm DAGONRO gt x Character Sets B 17 Character i Character i Character italic graph 3 italic graph j 4 italic graph 6 hh yO 7 8 9 va H A m EB dl V VWNWXXEXxGHU Qc NNxX XE x amp REo 0n 535u9 97095538 a 3 J 7 al EI f d 1 L d T F n F I ll le OODHAT QAMATADR Bao N VPOBPRBORVGHAODDHOHOD A Gy AS FRA 7 QAO SF 5 E le Il 1
38. e me or sn an n or non hex 30 to 39 3A 3C or SE 3B 3D or 3F dec 48 to 57 58 60 or 62 59 61 or 63 ASCII DC4 Startcode n Stop code DC4 hex 14 Startcode n Stop code 14 dec 20 Startcode n Stop code 20 10 REM code 2 5 industrial barcode 20 LPRINT CHRS 27 2 11 30 LPRINT CHR 26 B3 111 CHRS 25 40 LPRINT CHRS 20 123 CHR 20 50 LPRINT CHR 27 10 Barcode Printing 15 Code 2 5 Interleaved Type C Syntax Data Structure Example 0 Figures n Start code Stop code ASCII o to 9 nim or men 2 or wom hex 30 to 39 3A or 3C 3B or 3D dec 48 to 57 58 or 60 59 or 61 ASCII DC4 Startcode n n Stop code DC4 hex 14 Startcode n n Stopcode 14 dec 20 Startcode n n Stopcode 20 10 REM code 2 5 interleaved barcode 20 LPRINT CHR 27 11 30 LPRINT CHR 26 C3 111 CHRS 25 40 LPRINT CHRS 20 123 CHR 20 50 LPRINT CHR 27 10 Due to the interleaved mechanism data stream n n should only be transferred as even number e g not 398 but 0398 If odd count of numbers are transferred the printer adds a leading zero to the printed barcode 16 Barcode Printing Code 11 Type D Syntax Data Structure Example Figures Characters n Start code Stop code ASCII o to 9 and Ww enn Tm hex 30 to 39 and 2D 3A 3A dec 48 to 57 and 45 58 58 ASCII DC4 Startcode n n Stopcode DC4 hex 1
39. eee 90 CSI Pn w shared interface o o e ee 71 CSI Ps1 Ps2 Ps3 Pn4 Pnb v paper handling o llle 71 A 6 Summary of Possible Codes Sequence DEL ENQ ESC ESC F ESC F ESC F ESC F ESC ESC ESC ESC c ESC H ESC n ESC o ETX FF HT HTS IND LF NAK NEL NUL PLD Function Page control code DEL Delete 0 llle 97 control code ENQ Enquiry for Status 93 MTPL start character for program sequence 98 designate charactersetGO 000002 83 designate charactersetG1 0 00002 eee eee 83 designate charactersetG2 2 2 0 000002 83 designate character set G3 ee 83 LS3R Activation of G3 for codes A1 FE 81 LS2R Activation of G2 for codes A1 FE 81 LS1R Activation of G1 forcodesA1 FE 81 resetto initial State A ee 79 set horizontal tab St0P 0 o ee 46 LS2 Activation of G2 for codes 21 7E 81 LS2 Activation of G3 for codes 21 7E o 81 control code ETX End of Text Block 95 control code FF Form Feed 0 e 62 control code HT horizontal Step cnn 45 control code HTS o o a 45 control code IND Vertical Index o 51 control code LF Line Feed
40. in which the function and the short form of the sequence are listed without parameters e g Set Form Lenght in Lines CSI t With the CSI hex 9B dec 155 control code the most MTPL sequences are introduced MTPL Tally Printer Language 2 Introduction CSI means Control Sequence Introducer and is described by the code 9B hex or ESC 7 Bit environment gt hex 1B hex 5B ESC 8 Bit environment gt hex 9B It is sensible to use only ESC as Control Sequence Introducer if MTPL is used associated with any other printer emulation The last character in the following example t specifies the function of the sequence The header is followed by the Data Structure in ASCII hexadecimal und decimal syntax with the necessary parameters e g ASCII CSI n t A set form lenght in lines hex 9B n 74 dec 155 n 116 For the parameter here n it is necessary to differentiate between two types of syntax m ifthe parameter is in pointed parentheses the decimal value is transferred a ifthe parameter is not in pointed parentheses the ASCII value is transferred Example Parameter syntax lt n gt with n 0 to be transmitted dec 0 hex 00 Parameter syntax n with n 0 to be transmitted ASCII 0 hex 30 dec 48 Each sequence description or a number of the available parameters is additionally speci fied with a code level from A to C in square brackets e g A This thr
41. lt 127 Selects the pitch and point attributes for scalable fonts Pitch m 0 No change in pitch m 1 Selects proportional spacing m25 Selects fixed pitch equal to 360 m cpi m 36 default 10 cpi Points nyx256 n T point size A 1 point 7 72 inch i point size x 2 ny INT 286 E point size x 2 n MOD 355 ny n 0 No change in point size ki e default 10 5 points L 32 Character Styling O Not all printer fonts are scaleable Please refer to the printers reference manual which fonts are supported Scaleable fonts can only be printed in one quality LQ Points Following point sizes 1 72 inch are available 8 10 10 5 12 14 16 18 20 21 22 24 26 28 30 32 Pitch Previously set pitch settings will be cancelled Following sequences are ignored in scaleable font mode ESC SI condensed print ESC SO enlarged print mode automatically reset after one line ESC SP character spacing ESC W continuous enlarged print mode ON OFF ESC w double height SI condensed print ON SO enlarged print mode automatically reset after one line Following sequences will cancel the scaleable font mode ESC print mode selection ESC printer initialization ESC g character density 15 cpi ESC M character density 12 cpi Elite ESC P character density 10 cpi Pica ESC p proportional spacing ON OFF Character Styling 33 Print Quality ESC x Data Structure ASCII ESC x lt n gt o
42. lt 20 0 lt d lt 20 k 3 dy If only a single download character is to be defined x y is to be set qp When this command is transferred to the printer first of all all data in the print buffer are output 88 Download Character Generator Definition of the Character Grid NLQ characters consist of 18 vertical dots and 12 hori zontal dots Within this grid every num bered line or gap can be oc cupied including the lowest and the furthest right line You should however leave one or two columns empty so that neighboring charac ters do not touch For each column of the NLQ character it is necessary to de fine 3 Bytes Each bit of the data bytes corresponds to a certain value The example on the right shows the as signment of print dots to data bytes and the calculation of the values In order to determine the nu meric value of a column it is necessary to first of all add the values of the 3 bytes separa tely A byte with no print dot receives the numeric value 9 128 First Data Byte Second Data Byte Third Data Byte 123 468 6 7 8 91011 12 A 128 64 32 16 128 64 229 M lt 16 16 8 8 L 28 4 4 1 i 128 64 o R I o R Download Character Generator 89 The following example shows a user defined arrow with the list of the individual column values eac
43. lt ni gt lt m2 gt cc 63 ESC K lt ni gt lt n2 gt e ei a ee 63 ESC lt 5 gt lt ni gt lt n2 gt cc 63 ESC lt 4 gt lt ni gt lt n2 gt een 63 ESC lt 6 gt lt ni gt lt n2 gt o 63 ESC lt 38 gt lt n1 gt lt n2 gt cc 63 ESCAS eye ent to soe Stef Dn ale Ase ol ee 112 ES ls Ewa meos 97 ESC lt 2 gt nl n2 ooo ee 63 ESC roe eim et y e des 50 ESGOS ano ahr atrocidad eyed A 49 FAD ir o as 22 AE ee 117 ESC D lt nt gt lt n82 gt lt 0 gt en 47 ESTA ta Dn A d due 107 A duris atts or oon eee i fors fS 107 ESG Se adas fA ek a ok ese funem s 107 ESC BV ote ad tes Se UNTEN o rehus e ea 42 ESC m e AEN A AE teed ws 42 ESC a gt inc ra chore aedis ir A 14 ESEIA Las Meese us aoe Ano ae tame vata ada ate 12 Dp aie rs feme ee tabes de Gabe BOs 117 ESO Sis seed shar id a as 98 ESCA Side Ake omnt fe RN ee Ae Bist aw 27 Function national character set selection paper end sensor activation paper end sensor deactivation perforation skip print ASCII codes 128 to 159 print data as characters print mode selection print raster graphics print quality printer initialization printout of control codes proportional spacing ON OFF reassign graphics mode relative horizontal step reset all vertical tab stops reset condensed print reset enlarged print mode set by lt SO gt or ESC lt SO gt reset perforation skip right margin score selection select 9 dots graphics mode select download
44. m E SO gt N A n F SI O O DEL 7265 Programmer s Manual Figure 2 1 Default Character Set for ANSI Emulation 00 to 7F Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Code is Hexadecimal Ordered Column Row Figure 2 2 Default Character Set for ANSI Emulation 80 to FF Escape Sequence Summary 8 9 A B C F 0 DCS 1 PU1 i amp 2 6 C 3 4 IND 2 5 NEL 3 6 6 a 7 7 O 8 HTS gt o 9 A B A VTS 5 E H B PLD CSI Y I L C PLU ST Ya M P D RI OSC i Q 4 E T F x In this chart the 7 bit representation is given Use the Comparison Chart on page 4 to convert 7 bitto 8 bit sequences Code Description ESCH Set Horizontal Tab ESC J Set Vertical Tab ESCK Subscript Printing ESCL Superscript Printing ESCP Enter Dot Graphics ESCc Restore to Initial State ESC Exit Dot Graphics Modes ESC p1 p2 lt SP gt B Graphic Size Modification ESC p1 p2 lt SP gt G Line Character Spacing 7265 Programmer s Manual Copyright 2004 TallyGenicom 6 Chapter 2 ANSI Code Description ESC p1 p2 lt SP gt Select Emulation ESC p Horizontal Position Absolute ESC p a Horizontal Position Relative ESC p d Vertical Position Absolute ESC p e Vertical Position Relative ESC p
45. no C specifies an optional correction value for the vertical load position in n 1 72 inches top of form adjustment or vertical alignment also see Positioning the first print line Phys adj Operator s Manual chapter 4 76 Miscellaneous O Paper is ejected also by FF or the limit fixed by the form length or the bottom margin This sequence selects manual cut sheet paper process O This sequence selects fanfold paper process for tractor 1 Q This sequence selects fanfold paper process for optional tractor 2 If an optional tractor 2 is installed sequences for selecting the automatic single sheet feeder ASF are ignored O Selection of bin 1 or 2 Vertical alignment of the first printable line in steps of n1 72 inch downwards is optional n is set to 12 772 inch one line at 6 Ipi in the default menu Q Depending on the hardware up to 9 bins can be selected bin 1 9 CSI 21 CSI 29 Depending on the hardware and in the case a sorter has been installed up to 19 exit ports can be selected stacker 1 19 CSI 31 CSI 49 The page is set from view or tear off position perforation to print position This means that the print head moves to the current position or to the first possible line of the following document O Independent of the menu settings the paper is set to tear off position This sequence has no affect if the respective position is just set manual by means of the Tear key or automati
46. reset enlarged print mode set by lt SO gt or ESC lt SO gt 116 Control Code ESC oo 117 print mode selection 43 input data control bit 8 unchanged 107 absolute horizontal Step 51 select download character generator 79 select ROM character generator 79 define draft download characters 9 needle version 80 define NLQ download characters 9 needle version 88 define download characters 24 needle version 92 score Selection o ooo ooo o 40 print data as characters 0 95 set page length in units 7 setpagetommat o o oo 7 select graphics mode o o o oo o 67 assign character table 105 set unit us sn xU A A Y EM 62 set absolute vertical print position 59 set relative vertical print position 59 graphics 60 dpi o o o o o o o ooo o o 63 graphics 120dpi oo o o o ooo 63 high speed graphics 120 dpi 63 graphics 240 dpi o o o ooo ooo 63 graphics 80 dpi o o o o o o o o ooo 63 Sequence ESC lt 5 gt lt n1 gt lt n2 gt ESC lt 6 gt lt n1 gt lt n2 gt ESC lt 7 gt lt n1 gt lt n2 gt ESC lt 32 gt lt n1 gt lt n2 gt ESC lt 33 gt lt n1 gt lt n2 gt ESC lt 38 gt lt n1 gt lt n2 gt ESC lt 39 gt lt n1 gt lt n2 gt ESC 40 n1
47. x defined unit 1 length x page length defined unit my INT 256 page length x EE ME m MOD pag 9 defined unit En 256 o This sequence sets top and bottom margins to default Set page length first then load paper Using this sequence within the form sets top of form position at the current position Paper and Text Formatting 7 Set Page Format ESC c Data Structure ASCII ESC c lt n gt lt np gt lt t gt tuj bi bu set page format hex 1B 28 63 lt n gt lt n gt lt t gt tu bj bu dec 27 40 99 lt n gt lt np gt lt t gt tu bj lt by gt Description Valid values nL 4 nH 0 ty x 256 t lt b x 256 bi top margin lt bottom margin by x 256 bj x defined unit lt 22 bottom margin 22 inches Defines top and bottom margins previously defined with the sequence ESC U see page 62 top margin ty x 256 tj x defined unit t i DEED UU top margin X acne unit ty INT T t i A top margin X ce ned unit t MOD 266 top margin ty x 256 tj x defined unit 4 tt i See AA ed by MOD SEB tt i oo eto margin meda b MOD 256 8 Paper and Text Formatting o This sequence sets new top and bottom it does not affect the current page length setting Set top and bottom margin first then load paper Using this sequence within the form sets top margin at t
48. 0 30 48 Default menu 1 31 49 Menu No 1 2 32 50 Menu No 2 3 33 51 Menu No 3 4 34 52 Menu No 4 reserved Up to 3 4 various configurations can be saved with the printer Setting the configuration is made by the control panel of the printer refer to Operators Manual chapter 2 Menu Example CSIOSP q or CSISP q load default menu By using this sequence all settings changed by sequences are reset Miscellaneous 69 Automatic Gap Adjustment AGA CSI z Direct Setting of the Print Head Distance CSI y Data Structure ASCII CSI n ua tz B automatic gap adjustment 0 hex 9B n 2B 7A dec 155 n 43 122 ASCII CSI n ph y B direct setting of the print head distance o hex 9B n 2B 79 dec 155 n 43 121 Description For the sequence CSI n z the following parameters are available for n n hex dec Adjustment automatic 0 30 48 automatic adjustment OFF print head distance must be set at the printer 1 31 49 automatic adjustment ON O For the sequence CSI n y the following parameters are available for n n hex dec Setting direct 0 30 48 Default value is set at the printer n print head distance in n steps o Setting the print head distance accords to the respective paper path selected Unit adjust range and default setting depend on the device used If the Automatic Gap Adjustment is set to ON the sequence is ignored Example Settings of T2060 Unit 10 Micrometers Adjust range 1 10
49. 11 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 2 ANSI Commands Descripton ESC p1 RESET MODE ANSI pn l Resets mode s set by ESC p1 pn h p Effect 20 reset auto CR on LF Example reset auto CR on LF Dec 27 91 50 48 108 Hex 1B 5B 32 30 6C ESC gt SET MODE GENICOM p1 pn h This is an ANSI private use sequence p Effect 1 proportional print 2 reserved 3 80 hex 9B hex interpreted as C1 control codes 4 bold mode accomplished by overstrike 5 select character set 2 Example set proportional print Dec 27 91 62 49 104 Hex 1B 5B 3E 31 68 ESC gt RESET MODE GENICOM p1 pn I Resets modes set by ESC gt pn h See the previous command The parameter definitions are the same Example reset proportional print Dec 27 91 62 49 108 Hex 1B 5B 3E 31 6C 7265 Programmer s Manual 12 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 2 ANSI Commands Description ESC p1 p2 lt SP gt PAPER SHEAR If the paper shear option is installed then note that the appropriate strap must be set in the hardware options menu in order for the paper shear to work Parameter p1 1 selects the paper shear Parameter p2 1 executes a cutting sequence If the vertical position is not at top of form then a form feed is executed Paper is advanced to the shear position and cut Next it is advanced an inch to eject the sheet that has been cut off then it is retracted to the top
50. 110 LPRI 120 END 10 1 0 52 Print Positioning absolute horizon NT NT NT INT NT z d INT INT INT T CHRS 27 x1 CHR 27 C CHR 27 C CHR 27 C CHR 27 W1 CHR 27 C CHRS 27 C CHR 27 C 100 100 REM HRS 1 HRS 1 HR 170 CHR HRS 10 0 HRS 100 CHR 0 HRS 170 0 tal position select LQ L0 CHR 0 L00 CHRS 0 0 TO 100 170 10 100 170 Relative Horizontal Step ESC Data Structure Description ASCII ESC zn no set relative horizontal step hex 1B 5C n4 no dec 27 92 n4 no This code sequence moves the print head to a relative print position without regard to the current character density This print position is calculated according to the formula n4 256 no Each dot i e each print position has a width of 1429 inch in DPQ and 1480 inch in NLQ and LQ Calculation of the values of n and ns first requires the prefix n dots to be calculated If the movement is directed towards the left side the result is subtracted from 65536 Sub sequently the values for n and n can be calculated according to the formula n4 n MOD 256 No INT Do56 If the print position exceeds the currently set margins after execution of the horizontal step this code sequence is ignored This code sequence can be used in all print qualit
51. 2 PRINT lt 2 gt shadow characters LFS q CHRS 3 PRINT lt 3 gt outline shadow characters LFS ers lt 1 gt outline characters lt 2 gt snadow cnaract ars lt 3 gt outline shadow characters Character Styling 37 Emphasized Mode ON Emphasized Mode OFF Data Structure ASCII ESC E emphasized mode ON o hex 1B 45 dec 27 69 ASCII ESC F emphasized mode OFF o hex 1B 46 dec 27 70 Description O This code sequence switches the printer to emphasized mode During printing in emphasized mode each character is printed twice slightly shifted in horizontal direction Since the needles in the print head are fired twice instead of once as in standard mode print speed is reduced This code sequence is ignored if received while the printer is already in emphasized mode qp Emphasized mode plus condensed or Elite is not possible O This code sequence resets the emphasized mode initiated by ESC E or ESC Master Select This code sequence is ignored if the printer is not in emphasized mode Example 10 REM emphasized mode 20 LPRINT CHRS 27 F this is printed in the normal mode 30 LPRINT CHR 27 E and this is in the emphasized on 40 END this is printed in the normal mode and this is in the emphasized on 38 Character Styling Underline Mode ESC Data Structure ASCII ESC lt n gt orn underline mode ON OFF hex 1B 2D lt n gt orn dec 27 45 lt n gt orn Description This c
52. 7 2 inch line feeds are made until line spacing is changed by code sequences ESC 0 ESC 2 ESC 3 n ESC Anor ESC n This code sequence sets line spacing to 1 inch Once the line spacing has been changed by this sequence 1 inch line feeds are made until line spacing is changed by code sequences ESC 0 ESC 1 ESC 3 n ESC Anor ESC n Line Spacing 25 0 Example 26 Line Spacing Note that changing the line spacing also changes the number of lines per page Changing the line spacing does not affect the current tab stops or form length these two lines are printed with 1 8 inch lines are printed with 1 6 inch 10 REM fix line spacing 20 LPRINT CHRS 27 0 30 LPRINT 40 LPRINT a spacing of 50 LPRINT CHRS 27 2 60 LPRINT and these two 70 LPRINT a spacing of 80 END these two nes are li a spacing of and these two lines a spacing of 1 6 inch e 1 8 inc p utes with are printed with Variable Line Spacing n 180 Inch or n 216 Inch Variable Line Spacing n 60 Inch or n 72 Inch Variable Line Spacing n 360 Inch Data Structure Description ASCII ESC 3 lt n gt set n 180 inch line spacing D 11 hex 1B 33 lt n gt set n 216 inch line spacing dec 27 51 n ASCII ESC A lt n gt set n 60 inch line spacing D o hex 1B 41 lt n gt set n 72 inch line spacing dec 27 65 lt n gt ASCII ESC lt n gt set n 360 inch line spacing D e hex 1B 2B n de
53. 83 Designation of Character Set G3 83 Activation of Characters o e e 86 Size of Character Set 1 Character Set 88 Size of Character Set 2 Character Sets 88 Proportional Spacing Draft OFF o 89 Proportional Spacing Draft ON oo o 89 Font Selection for NLQ LQ only lll 89 F ont Selectlon imd ada a od GAS a e ROT eo 89 Print Code Area Expansion ON o e 90 Print Code Area Expansion OFF lll 90 Print Transparent Characters eae 90 Printer Identification DA lll 91 Device Status Report DSR o e 92 Enquiry for Status o llle 93 Fill Character e tics aa ra at 94 Start of Text BIoCK o da bone y pop a al Bacar wet 94 End of TextBlock 0 000020 eee eee eee 95 Positive Acknowledge 2 0 lll 95 Negative Acknowledge 0 0 lens 96 Clear Print Buler 2 52 ara aa a da ae ea A 96 Delta nens ees ii RE wy PESE blew es Le ds 97 Acoustic Alarmtt amp 3 102 Ge 22 dr be Re OS doe Boe Eee 97 Start Character Escape 98 MTPL Start Character Control Sequence Introducer 98 Appendix A Summary of Possible Codes Sorted by Sequences 00000 eee lll A 2 Sorted by Functions 2l A 8 Appendix B
54. 91 92 93 94 96 123 124 125 126 155 157 LocatonH 23 24 26 2A 40 5B 5C 5D 5E 60 7B 7C 7D 7E 9B 9C Character B Set 0 USA I 8 A E i EE 1 Germany amp 8 A A O u B 2 French A amp i u e 7 6 Italian I I amp d I8 ja jo e X 7 UK amp ei X 8 Spnth amp Q lA Ig X 9 DN AH amp QA iA j 16 Swedish al amp l Al j l l a l Y Figure 2 3 National Character Substitutions O 18 7265 Programmer s Manual 17 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 2 ANSI Line Character Spacing Command Description ESC p1 p2 LINE CHARACTER SPACING lt SP gt G Sets the vertical and horizontal pitch in decipoints Parameter p1 is the spacing between lines and p2 is the spacing between characters Unspecified parameters remain at their current values This command does not affect oversized printing selected by ESC 1t 18 7265 Programmer s Manual Chapter 2 ANSI Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Commands Description ESC p1 LINE CHARACTER SPACING p2 SP G p1 line spacing parameter p2 character spacing parameter If you select doublewide printing ESC 5m then the printer doubles character spacing set by this command
55. Ae E O EAS E 7 7 ia y 31 v 43 lt CTRL gt 8 8 2 k 32 W 44 lt CTRL gt gagi E PAE A RES X A A 5 7 lt CTRL gt to A 22 M 34 Y 46 lt CTRL gt 11 B 23 N 35 Z 7265 Programmer s Manual 59 Copyright 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes Code 93 Checksums for Full ASCII You can send any of the 128 ASCII characters verbatim in a Code 93 symbol You would not need to worry about Code 93 control codes if you did not need to compute checksums The four control characters in the Code 93 character table do not correspond to any byte values sent to the printer but instead refer to precedence codes that the printer generates If you send the printer a lowercase a in a Code 93 symbol for instance then the printer prints bars and spaces that correspond to the lt CTRL gt code in front of bars and spaces that correspond to the uppercase A The reader then interprets this character combination as a lowercase a So far this process is transparent both to routines sending symbol strings to the printer and to routines receiving decoded data from the reader When ASCII characters are represented as character combinations however the reader expects to see a checksum based on the values of these combinations this is the reason that the control codes are assigned values in the Code 93 character table The following example illustrates the calculation of the check digits
56. Bars per character 5 dark bars and 4 light bars Character set O through 9 Start Stop characters 2 dark bars and 1 light bar Center character code None NULL character Yes Intercharacter gap None Characters per symbol Variable Check digit None Delimiters Space comma horizontal tab hp relative 0 HR characters Currently selected font special HR font special OCR A OCR B font 120 DPI only 11 CPI at default element widths 4 3 12 Combined start stop character length Style 1 0 319 Style 3 0 139 O0 CO J O OF A Ol N gt 7265 Programmer s Manual 48 Copyright 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes Matrix 2 of 5 Style 2 Bars per character 3 dark bars and 2 light bars Character set O through 9 Start Stop characters 3 dark bars and 2 light bars Center character code None NULL character Yes Intercharacter gap None Characters per symbol Variable Check digit None Delimiters Space comma horizontal tab hp relative 0 HR characters Currently selected font special HR font special OCR A OCR B font 120 DPI only 11 CPI at default element widths 6 0 12 Combined start stop character length 0 278 gt 0 NI 0 A j nm Code 3 of 9 Style 4 1 Bars per character 5 dark bars and 4 light bars 2 Character set 0 through 9 upper case letters A through Z characters
57. Character Sets Standard Character Set B 2 International Substitution Table normal font B 3 Appendix C Additional Technical Description Index Description of MTPL Sequences Introduction Paper and Text Formatting Character Spacing Line Spacing Character Styling Print Positioning Graphics Miscellaneous Introduction Regardless of the specific MTPL sequences of your printer this User s Manual describes the sum of all MTPL sequences and control codes The only differentiation is made be tween 9 and 24 needle printers as well as the maximum possible paper width of 8 inches 80 column printer or 13 6 inches 132 column printer Please note that the print quality LQ Letter Quality is only available in the 24 needle printer Please be sure to observe the notes and steps described in the Operators Manual as well as the specific MTPL sequences implemented in your printer and which of the described sequences are thus not available Select the MTPL sequence as described in the Operator s Manual chapter 2 Apart from the command language MTPL your printer also understands other printer emu lation sequences and commands MTPL and an additional emulation can be active at the same time For this refer to the chapter 2 Emulations Operator s Manual The following explanations will help you understand the sequences better Every sequence description begins with a header
58. Dec 27 91 55 50 48 59 50 56 56 48 117 Hex 1B 5B 37 32 30 3B 32 38 38 30 75 The above example sets tabs at 1 inch and 4 inches Existing tab stops are not cleared Margin settings have no effect on the positions of tab stops ESC J SET VERTICAL TAB AT CURRENT POSITION VTS If 8 bit control code processing is enabled then both Dec 138 Hex 8A otherwise only Dec 27 74 Hex 1B 4A ESC p1 SET VERTICAL TABS AT SPECIFIED POSITIONS p2 p12 v Sets vertical tabs at positions p1 p2 p3 etc Up to 12 stops can be set at one time Tab stops are measured in decipoints from the top print reference Example Set tab stops at 4 and 7 inches Dec 27 91 50 56 56 48 59 53 48 52 48 118 Hex 1B 5B 32 38 38 30 3B 35 30 34 30 76 ESC Ps g CLEAR TABS Ps Effect 0 clear horizontal tab at current print position 1 clear vertical tab at current position 3 clear all horizontal tabs 4 clear all vertical tabs Example Clear all horizontal tabs Dec 27 91 51 103 Hex 1B 5B 33 67 7265 Programmer s Manual 28 Copyright 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 2 ANSI Dot Graphics Dot graphics allows you to print individual dots at any position on the page and thus to print pictures as well as text When you enter dot graphics the printer defaults to a dot density of 72 dpi horizontally and vertically and a line spacing of 12 Ipi Exiting from dot graphics returns the printer to its prior Ipi setting You can also choose a density of 144 dpi
59. E aes ar and dft ar 13 CS nS Par sus gee Hou m 26 CSIOSPq lll 20004 69 GSIT SP quam e um 69 GSI2 SP r acil RARO xen es 69 AS uuu angor hae deh ae a as 69 GSA SRE ue dew ot a a ee a 69 CSh2ISP X a erer bes eR Gece ala RP EA d 31 ESC uus Mec s dodo ORS oe Pn n Aa 81 ESCM x ruv i i a in ana 81 BSC Ors ace tia AA E ene s 81 ESC a pet De tia Bh ae ba eal S 81 ESC 4 TA xke A S act 81 GS TSBP X es seu x ave bd eto ams 31 SD Zur ar rte ea arab sae tS E TREE T 27 GSL 50 115 02 4 ie urged S donee dvi 76 CS151n na les 76 GSL52 Ti 5 1254 5 s mox EXTR 76 CSI 5 S mg uus adu Eo edu dedic 80 COSTADO tme 8 RAUS a Veios me 80 CS 2 2 ge osx LAN he e e 80 ESTAS a a aue a aet es 80 Summary of Possible Codes A 11 Function MTPL IBM Proprinter XL command set MTPL NEC P60 70 command set MTPL command set MTPL start character for program sequence MTPL start character for program sequence near letter quality NLQ NLQ at 10 cpi NLQ at 12 cpi normal color or normal intensity output paper to stacker 1 sorter overline mode OFF overline mode ON paper handling print code area expansion ON print code area expansion OFF print transparent characters proportional mode OFF proportional mode OFF proportional mode ON proportional mode ON proportional spacing Draft off proportional spacing Draft on reduced character spacing request for device status report request for printer identification reset color reset
60. Emphasized Mode ON o o llle 35 Emphasized Mode OFF e eens 35 Italic Mode ON 2 36 Italic Mode OFF ac alae dea ee A ate a a 36 Proportional Mode ON SGR 0 a 37 Proportional Mode OFF v e sateya p aa ee 37 Underline Mode ON SGR o llle 39 Underline Double Mode 0 e e e 39 Underline Mode OFF llle 39 Overline Mode ON SGR o 00 eee es 40 Overline Mode OFF llle 40 Double Strike ON llle 41 Double Strike OFF llle 41 Graphic Size Selection GSS 0 oo 42 Graphic Size Modification GSM lll 42 Font Designation FNT lr 43 Print Positioning lees 45 Horizontal TabStop o e 45 Set Horizontal Tab Stop at Current Position 45 Horizontal Tab Stops ON o e e 46 Horizontal Tab Stops OFF TBC o o 46 Line foed 4g XAR A AD WEY 49 Vertical Tab Stop e ee 50 Set Vertical Tab Stop at Current Position 51 Vertical Inidex usse Fab e a ea ok Ro UK RU D ae A ae 51 Vertical Tab StopsON 2 e 52 Vertical Tab Stops OFF TBC llle 52 Horizontal Posititon Absolute HPA 54 Horizontal Position Relative HPR llle 55 Horizontal Position Backward HPB
61. Escape Sequences Introduction dos eke oy Bud e sees dea ee a oN Paper and Text Formatting o Form Lerngtli ce doi ia AA SOR RORIS GR gp Page Length in Units 0 o lll PageFormat 2l Perforation Skip llle RightMargin ee LeftMargin e uou gos Ro om oem rode em E YU mx E Justification and Centering lr Character Spacing l e o HMI Horizontal Motion Index llle Enlarged printmode e eee ee ee Continuous enlarged print mode rss Condensed Character Density Character Density 10 cpi 2 o Character Density 12 cpi 2 o o Character Density 15 cpi o o e Proportional Spacing ln Character Spacing 0 e ee Line Spacing s im aa a a Eee Fixed Line Spacing 1 8inch lll Fixed Line Spacing 7 72 inch 0 o Fixed Line Spacing 1 6inch o o Variable Line Spacing n 180 or n 216 Inch Variable Line Spacing n 60 or n 72 INCh Variable Line Spacing n 360 Inch Character Styling Super Subscript Mode ON Double Strike Select Font and Pitch by Point Print Quality Font Type Selection Typeface Selection
62. LPRINT Channel 1 140 GOSUB 180 150 END 160 FOR I 1 TO 3 170 LPRINT CHRS 11 180 LPRINT VT Position I 190 NEXT 200 RETURN Channel 0 VT Position 1 VT Position 2 VT Position 3 Channel 1 VT Position 1 VT Position 2 VT Position 3 58 Print Positioning Set Absolute Vertical Print Position ESC V Data Structure ASCII ESC V lt n gt lt ny gt lt m_ gt lt my gt set absolute vertical print pos hex 1B 28 56 nj lt ny gt lt m_ gt lt my gt dec 27 40 86 nj lt ny gt lt m_ gt lt my gt Description Valid values n 2 ny 0 0 lt m lt 255 0 lt mp lt 127 Defines the vertical print position in units previously defined with the sequence ESC U see page 62 vertical position my x 256 m x defined unit top margin position 4 vertical position top margin position x defined unt my INT 256 i vertical position top margin position x defined uni m MOD 256 o The default unit for this sequence is Vago Only positions within a valid form can be achieved Positions below bottom margin will a eject paper single sheet and b set new position to top of form at next page Print Positioning 59 Set Relative Vertical Print Position ESC v Data Structure ASCII ESC y zn lt ny gt lt m_ gt lt my gt set relative vertical print pos hex 1B 28 76 nj lt ny
63. LPRINT First character without descender 4 280 LPRINT Second character with descender gt SSSSSSSSSS 290 LPRINT Both characters mixed gt SHSHSHSHS 300 END 4x3 Draft print quality ssi First character without descender 0000009080 Second character with descender gt 00900900006 Both characters mixed gt 0009000008 4339 Proportional mode First character without descender 0000000000 Second character with descender gt 0000000000 Both characters mixed 0000090009 Download Character Generator 87 Definition of NLQ Characters 9 needle printer The definition of NLQ characters is more comprehensive than the definition of draft char acters since a larger number of dots is required o User defined NLQ characters can only be generated in the NLQ mode of the printer Data structure ASCII ESC amp NUL x y do d4 de lt ny gt lt nx gt data 1 character do d4 do n4 ny data 2 character hex 1B 26 00 dez 27 38 0 Description X first character to be redefined y last character to be redefined do leading space of the character d4 number of columns of the defineded character da following space of the character k number of data bytes to transmit n4 data bytes 3 data bytes for one column Values of parameters 0x dy x 20 O lt d
64. O This sequence enables proportional spacing for the print quality DRAFT It is the default setting Font Selection for NLQ LQ only CSI 52h Font Selection CSI 52 Data Structure ASCII CSI 5p o hm A print control ignores the font IDs of the hex 9B 3F 35 32 68 default character generator dec 155 63 53 50 104 ASCII CSI g or e A print control does not ignore the font IDs hex 9B 3F 35 32 69 of the default character generator o dec 155 63 53 50 105 default Description The font settings CSI 10 19 m are only valid and can only be selected for the print qualities NLQ and LQ All print qualities Draft NLQ LQ are valid if fonts are selected using sequence CSI 10 19 m This is the default setting Miscellaneous 89 Print Code Area Expansion ON CSI 53 h Print Code Area Expansion OFF CSI 53 Data Structure ASCII CSI 5 3 pn A print code area expansion on 0 hex 9B 3F 35 33 08 dec 155 63 53 51 104 ASCII CSI 9 Br Qe e A print code area expansion off o hex 9B 3F 35 33 69 dec 155 63 53 51 105 Description This code sequence causes the printout of the higher control codes ASCII 128 to 159 in the form of characters and symbols instead of the repetition of the functions of ASCII codes 0 to 31 O When the printer receives this code sequence the ASCII codes 128 to 159 are used as duplicates of the functions of the lower control codes 0 to 31 Print Transpare
65. OL e eI we NE HUT NC EIE me nri so J Poo o SO N SI 0 DLE p o 0 P J P p bev SQ 1 1 tT AQ tt a gq JE ES ERIT ERR RR AR eee bea ss pl 1 ee eee ee eee Des er A A A O E 81 e bez E MITRE BINE NEU ow P Q NAS OU ie S Ses ee U SVN ET OV ae EE E re V EB w AAA w W CAN sx 8 8 J X X x X JE SE ae ee aie ae Y SUB Ja SZ xs qur epus deg ee ES Esc A F kK FS B lt G Q A 1 99 ee spe DL 9eM ee ee RS feo AAN S US E Sod T 7265 Programmer s Manual 62 Copyright 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes Chapter 4 ANSI Oversized Font This chapter describes the characteristics and lists the ANSI control sequences for the rotatable oversized font a unique sans serif font with character shapes designed to accommodate very large expansions This is an industrial strength feature Horizontal resolution is held to 120 dpi to enable oversized printing at carriage speeds of up to 50 inches per second Combined with vertical logic seeking this enables the 7265 to print complex mixes of character sizes and rotations at creditable throughputs The oversized font is monospaced only ANSI print modes bold underscored doublewide and proportional have no effect You can print characters 20 hex through 7F hex characters above this range are ig
66. Partial Line Down control code PLU Partial Line Up control code RI Reverse Index control code STX Start of Text Block control code VT Vertical Tab Stop control code VTS cut sheet paper default color black designate character set GO designate character set G1 designate character set G2 designate character set G3 device status report Busy no malfunction device status report Ready no malfunction device status report Some malfunction detected aS direct setting of the print head distance default value direct setting of the print head distance in n steps double height OFF double height ON lower half double height ON upper half double strike OFF double strike ON double underline mode draft print quality DPQ eject form emphasized mode ON emphasized mode ON end of command interpretations fanfold paper fast draft print quality font 0 DPQ Sequence Page Ei ui as faeces Cag ae kk zx e ante te Gok Bias asa 45 IND s nett ce la a Re dea M Deanne a de 51 LE o sas een Mae Me eps ea ke pay Si ines 49 NAK 1 2 ok moe des e dob Pe tle es ee de 95 NER ur da a A 64 NEUE cee et alo ar A o ek e 94 PED 43 uh na bo daa duh ume 63 PLU 2 to i a ee x Aet See 63 A e een Ae a Se de e Lap ak Ts e 64 SPE 2 tabaco de ke et eg also apar DM 94 A at ade canes MERE 50 E be ps ae arti A 51 GSlOnrznEl watea eTe Pe dd 76 CSI 39e Air Aue Boe a hE aie a Ae 72 BSC Et eb od ao em nd Mim Mrs
67. V ESC v ESC C ESC c The default values of these sequences is defined at 1360 inch 62 Print Positioning Graphics Graphics 60 dpi Graphics 120 dpi High Speed Graphics 120 dpi Graphics 240 dpi Graphic Modes Data Structure ASCII ESC K n4 no graphics 60 dpi hex 1B 4B n4 no dec 27 75 n4 no ASCII ESC L lt n gt no graphics 120 dpi hex 1B 4C n4 no dec 27 76 n4 no ASCII ESC Y zn no high speed graphics 120 dpi hex 1B 59 lt ny gt no dec 27 89 n4 no ASCII ESC Z lt n gt no graphics 240 dpi hex 1B 5A n4 no dec 27 90 n4 no ASCII ESC 0 n4 no graphic modes hex 1B 2A 00 n no dec 27 42 0 n4 no Description Data following the graphics ESC sequence is printed out as a dot pattern The number of bytes of the graphics string is defined by n4 and ns You will find a list of all sequences and the available parameter values m for the ESC code sequences on the following page Graphics 63 8 Point pese Print Mode Dots ES Inch d per Serene horizont vertic Dols ESC K ESC 0 single density 60 720 8 possible ESC L ESC 1 double density 120 eo ED 8 possible ESC Y ESC 2 double density 120 8 not high speed possible ESC Z ESC 3 quadruple density 240 8 not po
68. a higher numbered parameter while leaving lower numbered parameters alone For example to set the horizontal print density to 60 dpi without changing any other bar code attributes you could send ESC 0 Semicolons that trail the last specified parameter are optional For example to turn off the human readable line without changing any other parameters you could send ESC 0 Or you could send Note The term default is misleading when applied to bar code parameters This printer stores bar code parameters in nonvolatile RAM while power is off except for an ISU or an out of range argument you might never see the effects of the factory defaults For this reason your application should probably initialize all 12 parameters one time before any symbols are sent This is particularly true when other bar code applications are sharing the printer 7265 Programmer s Manual 36 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes Bar Code Command Sequences Command Description ESC 3t ENABLE BAR CODES Enables Bar Codes with the characteristics set by ESC p1 p2 ESC 3t selects Bar Code mode and activates Bar Code printing Dec 279151116 Hex 1B 5B 33 74 ESC 0t SO CANCEL OVERSIZED EXPANDED BAR CODE MODES Dec 279148116 Hex 1B 5B 30 74 SHIFT OUT Turns off bar code printing then enters bar code mode again Dec 14 Hex OE SI SHIFT IN SI turns bar code printing
69. bee es Eien mE Boek 46 Function shared interface single shift 2 SS2 single shift 3 SS3 size of character set 1 character set size of character set 2 character sets size unit Decididots size unit Decipoints size unit Decipoints size unit Micrometers size unit Millimeters size unit Mils size unit Pixels spacing increment start of Barcode interpretation subscript ON super sub and microscript OFF superscript ON top and bottom margin turn OFF positioning unit mode turn ON positioning unit mode underline mode OFF underline mode ON vertical position absolute vertical position backward vertical position relative vertical spacing 12 Ipi vertical spacing 2 Ipi vertical spacing 3 Ipi vertical spacing 4 Ipi vertical spacing 6 Ipi vertical spacing 8 Ipi vertical tab stop Sequence Page CSL PD WE nu Soa a bk oe a e A Ae T 71 SO ae MR to hy a en a eek os ae 86 T ie peers A ANN 86 CSI PESO sic se cic ads a GS EH 88 CSI 50 ars ae Pll bk Be he 88 CSESSP lt Av ame t Sis cb oes ie eG Gee 8 CSIOSPI oe Sane e kee Wie ele enn 8 ESPLSPI ir eee A ee oe 8 CSL6 SBb Lol a Sl aa te una 8 ANS Ral export ty rh ptr aet ERES 8 GSIASP Nit a eee x ex 8 GSE SPI ua e bon oe GOR us 8 ES MN SPB a ee ak ut 15 GSN elise es aos 80 CSLL epg Sc tritio d 27 SE IZo im ieee ib E Lene eve INE OR A ae cs 27 ESLOZ i oos s eti a E ete Ae iE x 27 CSI uto Ine Ree 9 GST A tese 7 ESTATAL ub bw is bt e 7 CSI 2A m eka ae a Be 3
70. code UPC E with HRI 20 LPRINT CHR 27 11 30 LPRINT CHR 26 P3 111 CHR 25 40 LPRINT CHRS 20 01234567 CHRS 20 50 LPRINT CHRS 27 210 0 123456 28 Barcode Printing Code UPC E without HRI Type Q Syntax Data Structure Example Figures n Check Number c Start code Stop code ASCII 0 to g Calculation Win 1 1 hex 30 to 39 On 3A 3A Check Number dec 48 to 57 Calculation 58 58 ASCII DC4 Startcode nnnnnnnc Stopcode DC4 hex 14 Start code nnnnnnnc Stopcode 14 dec 20 Start code nnnnnnnc X Stopcode 20 10 REM code UPC E without HRI 20 LPRINT CHR 27 11 30 LPRINT CHR 26 03 111 CHRS 25 40 LPRINT CHRS 20 01234567 CHRS 20 50 LPRINT CHR 27 10 Barcode Printing 29 Code Delta distance IBM Type R Syntax Figures Characters n Start code Stop code ASCII o to 9 and A to FE E D hex 30 to 39 and 41 to 46 46 44 dec 48 to 57 and 65 to 70 70 68 Data Structure ASCII DC4 Startcode n n Stop code DC4 hex 14 Startcode n n Stopcode 14 dec 20 Startcode n n Stopcode 20 Example 10 REM code delta distance IBM without HRI 20 LPRINT CHR 27 11 30 LPRINT CHR 26 R3 111 CHRS 25 40 LPRINT CHR 20 F0123D CHR 20 50 LPRINT CHR 27 10 30 Barcode Printing Code 128 Type S Syntax Figures Characters n S
71. code with the smaller value is ignored Horizontal tab stops can be set at positions 1 to 255 136 columns printer resp 1 to 160 80 columns printer Horizontal tab stops set by this sequence remain effective until the printer again receives code se quence ESC D or until it is initialized by code sequence ESC For proportional spacing tab stops are set in pica spacing 10 cpi A horizontal tabulation is executed by HT control code hex 09 dec 9 This code sequence cancels all previous tab stops Print Positioning 47 o When the printer is switched on or ESC Q is sent horizontal tab stops are set at every eight position 9 17 25 etc Example 10 REM horizontal tabs 20 LPRINT CHRS 27 D CHR 0 REM clear old tabs 30 LPRINT CHR 27 D CHR 10 CHR 20 CHR 30 CHR 0 40 LPRINT CHR 18 REM 10 cpi 50 LPRINT 123456789012345678901234567890123456789 60 GOSUB 120 70 LPRINT CHR 14 REM double width 80 GOSUB 120 90 LPRINT CHR 15 REM condensed 100 GOSUB 120 110 END 120 LPRINT CHR 9 tab1 130 LPRINT CHR 9 tab2 140 LPRINT CHR 9 tab3 R ETURN 123456789012345678901234567890123456789 tabi tab2 tab3 tab tab tabs tabi tab2 tab3 48 Print Positioning Set Horizontal and Vertical Step Width ESC e Data Structure Description ASCII ESC e NUL n Set horizontal step width o hex 1B 65 00 lt n gt dec 27 101 0 lt n gt ASCII ESC e SOH n Set vertical
72. com mand is received all data in the buffer are printed 50 Print Positioning Absolute Horizontal Step ESC Data Structure ASCII ESC n4 no set absolute horizontal step hex 1B 24 n4 no dec 27 36 n4 no Description This code sequence moves the print head to an absolute print position independent of the current character density The positioning is in increments of Vo inches The print positi on from the left hand margin is then calculated as n4 No 256 The value specified for n must be in the range of 0 to 255 the value specified for nz must be in the range of 0 to 3 o This code sequence can be used in all print qualities DPQ NLQ LQ Example for calculating n4 and no The print position is 4 5 inches which corresponds to a number of dots of 270 4 5 inch x 60 dots inch 270 dots No number of dots divided by 256 27056 dec 1 hex 01 n4 remainder of division of np dec 14 hex 0E Note that you obtain the same result by using the formula given for calculating n4 and no for relative horizontal step see sequence ESC Only the way to get it is different The reason for these different descriptions is that customers programming experience is not the same Therefore this is meant to be a little help for you to choose the easiest way Print Positioning 51 Example 10 REM 20 LPRI 30 LPRI 40 LPRI 50 LPRI 60 LPRI 70 LPRI 80 LPRI 90 LPRI 100 LPRI
73. command takes effect following the next line terminator Dec 27 91 115 Hex 1B 5B 73 7265 Programmer s Manual 25 Copyright 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 2 ANSI Honzontd Movement Commands Description HT HORIZONTAL TAB Causes the current print position to move to the next tab stop If no tabs are set then the current position moves one space If tab s are set but no tab s are set between the active print position and the right margin then following characters on the line are either discarded or printed on the next line depending on the status of auto wrap Dec 9 Hex 09 CR CARRIAGE RETURN Initiates printing and returns the current print position to the left margin Dec 13 Hex OD ESC p a HORIZONTAL POSITION RELATIVE Advances the current print position by the distance specified Parameter p is specified in decipoints Example ESC 1080a advances the print position 1 5 inches Dec 27 91 49 48 56 48 97 Hex 1B 5B 31 30 38 30 61 ESC p j HORIZONTAL POSITION BACKWARDS Moves the horizontal position p decipoints left of the current position Actual distance between symbols separated by this command is the argument p minus the current horizontal pitch text or graphics For example if you print an uppercase E at 10 cpi move backwards by p and print another uppercase E then the distance between leading edges of the two characters is p 72 decipoints If you print graphics at 72
74. cpi in this sequence means higher horizontal resolution of the printed characters emphasized printing but lower print speed Various character densities can also be used within one line The default value for the character density is the printer menu setting 16 Character Spacing Example 10 REM character densities 20 LPRINT CHR 27 4wthis is 10 cpi 30 LPRINT CHR 27 12wthis is 10 cpi high resolution 40 LPRINT CHR 27 5wthis is 12 cpi s 50 LPRINT CHR 27 6wthis is 15 cpi 60 LPRINT CHR 27 7wthis is 17 1 cpi s 70 LPRINT CHR 27 11wthis is 20 cpi 80 LPRINT CHR 27 Owthis is 5 cpi 90 LPRINT CHR 27 1wthis is 6 cpi 100 LPRINT CHR 27 2wthis is 7 5 cpi 110 LPRINT CHR 27 3wand 8 6 cpi 120 END this is 10 cpi this is 10 cpi high resolution this is 12 cpi this is 15 cpi this is 17 1 cpi this is 20 cpi this is 5 Cpi this is 6 cpi this is 7 5 cpi and 8 6 cpi Character Spacing 17 Horizontal Character Spacing SHS CSI SP K Data Structure ASCII CSI n SP K A set cpi hex 9B n 20 4B dec 155 n 32 75 Description For n the following parameters are available n hex dec character spacing 0 30 48 10 cpi 1 31 49 6 cpi 2 32 50 12 cpi 3 33 51 15 cpi With this sequence the horizontal character spacing is defined qp The change of the character dimensions is implementation dependent 18 Character Spacing Character Spacing SCS CSI SP y Data Stru
75. current vertical position IND ASCII IND A vertical index hex 84 dec 132 The code IND moves the active print position to the following line The difference to Line Feed LF is that IND does not permit an CR option Print Positioning 51 Vertical Tab Stops ON Vertical Tab Stops OFF TBC Data Structure ASCII CSI n v A set vertical tab stop 0 hex 9B n 76 dec 155 n 118 ASCII CSI 1 y A clear all vertical tab stops at current position hex 9B 31 67 dec 155 49 103 ASCII CSI 4 y A clear all vertical tab stops hex 9B 34 67 dec 155 52 103 Description o n 1 132 lines at a line spacing of t 6 inch 6 Ipi 1 176 lines at a line spacing of 1 inch 8 Ipi Up to 16 tab stops can be joined in one sequence as follows CSI n1 n2 na3 ntev The parameters do not have to be sorted The positions of the horizontal tab stops depend on the current character density Examples CSI g clear horizontal tab stop at current position CSI 3 4g clear all horizontal and vertical tab stops for this also see page 46 Horizontal Tab Stops ON OFF ep Later changes of character density will not influence the physical position of the tab stops 52 Print Positioning A vertical tabulation is executed by the VT control code hex 0B dec 11 also see page 50 Vertical Tab Stop Example 10 REM vertical tabs 20 LPRINT CHR 27 10t REM set form length 30 LPRINT CHR 27 4g REM clear all vtabs 40 LPRINT
76. decpoints from the bottom of the lowercase j The distance from the top of an oversized character cell to the baseline is 0 7 decipoints times the vertical expansion factor Top of the character cell means the upper boundary of the cell before it was rotated 7265 Programmer s Manual 69 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 4 ANSI Oversized Oversized Character Dimensions 270 The width of a character cell is 0 6 decipoints times the horizontal expansion factor Width means the dimension that is left to right as you read the character The height of a character cell is 1 08 decipoints times the vertical expansion factor Height means the dimension that is vertical as you read the character 0 76 x Pv lt 0 6 x Ph E a i Figure 4 4 Sideways Character Dimensions The distance from the top of the character cell to the baseline is 0 76 decipoints times the vertical expansion factor Top of cell means the upper boundary of the character cell as you read the character When printing strings of sideways characters the printer adds horizontal space between character cells This space is equal to 0 36 decipoints times the vertical expansion factor Vertical Position Relative in Oversized Normally the origin of a vertical position relative move is the current position If the last object printed on the current line was an oversized character however then the origin of a vertical position relative move is the to
77. dpi move backwards by p and print another graphics column then the distance between the two graphics columns is p 10 decipoints This command enables printing left of the left margin Any data located left of the left print reference is discarded Example ESC 1080j moves the horizontal position back by 1 5 inches Dec 27 91 49 48 56 48 106 Hex 1B 5B 31 30 38 30 6A 7265 Programmer s Manual 26 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 2 ANSI Commands Description ESC p HORIZONTAL POSITION ABSOLUTE Causes the print position to move in decipoints a specified distance from the left print reference Example ESC 360 Move print head 12 from left print reference Dec 27 91 51 54 48 96 Hex 1B 5B 33 36 30 60 BS BACKSPACE Prints the data in the print buffer then moves the print position one character position to the left Dec 8 Hex 08 7265 Programmer s Manual 27 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 2 ANSI Tabs This printer stores tab stops in NVRAM while power is off Therefore all tab stops should be cleared before new stops are set Commands Description ESC H SET HORIZONTAL TAB AT CURRENT POSITION HTS If 8 bit control code processing is enabled then both Dec 136 Hex 88 otherwise only Dec 27 72 Hex 1B 48 ESC p1 SET HORIZONTAL TABS AT SPECIFIED POSITIONS p2 p22 u Sets up to 22 stops at one time The value of p1 p2 etc are in decipoints 1 inch 720 decipoints
78. following ESC L superscript If 8 bit control code processing is enabled then Dec 139 Hex 8B otherwise Dec 27 75 Hex 1B 4B ESC L SUPERSCRIPT PRINTING PLU Moves paper 1 2 line above the current line for superscript printing ESC L is used to return to the original line following ESC K subscript If 8 bit control code processing is enabled then Dec 140 Hex 8C otherwise Dec 27 76 Hex 1B 4C NOTE The partial line up does not respect top of form that is following a form feed ESC L causes a partial line movement upward Also partial line down does not respect bottom of form that is when printing the last line on the form ESC L causes a partial line movement downward When printing the last line on a form do not send a line feed LF code to move directly from superscript to subscript The LF code will be acted upon as the bottom of form terminator 7265 Programmer s Manual 21 Copyright 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 2 ANSI Vertical Movement Absolute positions are calculated from the top and left print references without respect to margin settings The top of a character cell located at vertical position absolute 0 is at top print reference The left edge of a character cell located at horizontal position absolute 0 is at the left print reference If the default left print reference is current and if the left tractor position s are as shipped then this is about 0 6 inches from the left edge of the paper Top and left pr
79. form 1 Line 2 Length 3 form 2 Line 1 Length 3 form 2 Line 2 Length 3 form 3 Line Length 3 form 3 Line Na 6 Paper and Text Formatting Turn ON Positioning Unit Mode SM CSI 11 h Turn OFF Positioning Unit Mode RM CSI 11 Data Structure ASCII csi 4 1 pn A turn PUM ON hex 9B 31 31 68 dec 155 49 49 104 ASCII pe p e A turn PUM OFF hex 9B 31 31 69 dec 155 49 49 105 Description PUM Positioning Unit Mode This mode decides wether positioning commands or functions that deal with horizontal or vertical position parameters have characters and line positions as parameters or some fixed units defined by the SSU control function Select Size Unit see the following sequence If PUM is turned on and no unit is defined the units shall default to decipoints 1 720 of an inch If PUM is turned off the units shall default to line or character distances qp By default the PUM mode is turned off If PUM ist activated the accuracy cannot exceed the vertical or horizontal resolution of your printer Paper and Text Formatting 7 Select Size Unit SSU CSI SPI Data Structure ASCII CSI n SP I B select size unit hex 9B n SP 49 dec 155 n SP 73 Description For n the following parameters are available n hex dec size unit 0 30 48 Decipoints 1 720 inch 0 0353 mm 1 31 49 Millimeters 2 32 50 Decipoints 0 0353 mm 3 33 51 Decididots 0 0376 mm 4 34 52 Mils 14000 inch 0 0254 mm 5 35 53 Basic Measur
80. gt lt m_ gt lt my gt dec 27 40 118 nj ny lt m_ gt lt my gt Description Valid values n 2 ny 0 0 lt m lt 255 0 lt mp lt 127 Defines the vertical print position relatively up and down in units previously defined with the sequence ESC U see page 62 horizontal position my x 256 m x defined unit current position Downwards i 1 rtical position t posit a E vertical position current position x defined unit i 256 vertical position current position x ITE m 256 Upwards 1 current position vertical position x defined unity my 32768 INT current position vertical position x defined unit m 32768 MOD BER 60 Print Positioning The default unit for this sequence is Vago Only positions within a valid form can be achieved The current position is base for the newly defined relative positions Positions exceeding the defined top margin will be ignored Positions below bottom margin will a eject paper single sheet and b set new position to top of form at next page Print Positioning 61 Set Unit ESC U Data Structure ASCII ESC U eni ny m set unit hex 1B 28 55 nj ny lt m gt dec 27 40 85 nj ng lt m gt Description Valid values n 1 ny 0 m 10 20 30 40 50 60 Sets the units to 5600 inch Following commands are using this unit ESC
81. holders CENTRONICS of GENICOM LLC Epson of Epson America Incorporated DEC of COMPAQ Corporation GENICOM of TallyGenicom LP IBM and Proprinter of International Business Machines Corporation The information in this manual is believed to be accurate and correct However TallyGenicom makes no claim as to its absolute accuracy and reserves the right to make improvements to this document from time to time 7265 Programmer s Manual 1 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 1 Introduction 2 ANSI The TallyGenicom im ple m entation of ANSI X3 64 is the native control protocol for the 7265 printer as it is for a variety of other TallyGenicom impact matrix printer families The control functions presented here are a superset of ANSI control sets familiar to our customers For the most part ANSI drivers written for other TallyGenicom printers should only need to be modified as features introduced on the 7265 Series printers are exercised Examples of such new features include user defined formats alternate paper paths user defined character substitutions and remote selection of emulations Enabling the application to select among emulations provides access to some of the 7265 features not supported in emulated products Toward this end the printer can be commanded to maintain the current status of fonts pitches tabs margins and so forth across emulation changes Although some minute differences due to translations from say columns to de
82. i li 02 38 F F 38 74 LF j 74 3 03 39 G G 39 75 VT k 75 4 04 40 H H 40 76 FF 76 5 05 41 l 41 77 CR m 77 6 amp amp 06 42 J J 42 78 SO n 78 7 i 07 43 K K 43 79 SI o 79 8 08 44 L L 44 80 DLE p 80 9 09 45 M M 45 81 DC1 q 81 10 t 10 46 N N 46 82 DC2 r 82 11 11 47 O O 47 83 DC3 S 83 12 f i 12 48 P P 48 84 DC4 t 84 13 hyphen hyphen 13 49 Q Q 49 85 NAK u 85 14 period period 14 50 R R 50 86 SYN V 86 15 15 51 S S 51 87 ETB w 87 16 0 0 16 52 T T 52 88 CAN x 88 17 1 1 17 53 U U 53 89 EM y 89 18 2 2 18 54 V V 54 90 SUB z 90 19 3 3 19 55 W W 55 91 ESC 91 20 4 4 20 56 X X 56 92 FS 92 21 5 5 21 57 Y Y 57 93 GS 93 22 6 6 22 58 Z Z 58 94 RS s 94 23 7 7 23 59 59 95 US DEL 95 24 8 8 24 60 60 96 FNC3 FNC3 96 25 9 9 25 61 61 97 FNC2 FNC2 97 26 26 62 A G 62 98 SHIFT SHIFT 98 27 27 63 a 63 99 CODEC CODEC 99 28 lt lt 28 64 NUL 64 100 CODEB FUNCA CODEB 29 B 29 65 SOH a 65 101 FNC4 CODEA CODEA 30 gt gt 30 66 STX b 66 102 FNC1 FNC1 FNC1 31 2 2 31 67 ETX C 67 32 Qo o 32 68 EOT d 68 Codes 96 through 102 do not have 33 A A 33 69 ENQ e 69 corresponding ASCII character 34 B B 34 70 ACK f 70 translations these may be encoded 35 C C 35 71 BEL 9 71 using the special character table above Barcode Printing 33 Example 34 Barcode Printing 10 20 30 40 50 EEE EM code 128 PRINT PRINT PRINT PRINT CHRS 27 211 CHRS 26 S3 111 CHR
83. is 12 20 inch If the field consists of two values separated by a slash for example 12 5 the first value stands for the italic character the second for graphics The values of the character widths are units of 160 inch For example The value in the field for character width is 30 that means the width of the character is 3060 inch If the field consists of two values separated by a slash for example 30 20 the first value stands for the normal character the second for the character width with super or subscript activated The values of the character widths are depending on your selected point size if using scaleable fonts In normal print mode values described in ED table are also valid in mode Character Sets B 11 Proportional width during scaleable font mode The values of the character widths are depending on the selected point size at your printer The width of the scaleable fonts are based on the width of a proportional 10 5 point character Calculate the width as follows point size x base width INT i T 05 character width 360 inch Example for a 24 point 0 INT a AC 05 character width 360 inch e y INT 69 07 character width 3960 inch 69 character width 360 inch The base width for the large character 0 is 30 Please refer to the table 24 B 12 Character Sets EN 24 Needle Printer Width Width Width in 1 360 in 1 360 in 1 360
84. it om dod AAA RA RA AI 42 Horizontal Tab Delimiter cccccccnnnnnnnnnncononccononocononnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnon 44 Horizontal Position Relative Delimiter ooooooncnnnncconcccccnccnnnnncnnnnncnnnnonnnanannnnnnons 45 Calculating Characters per Inch oooonoonnninnnnn nennen ener eee 47 Bar Code Style Characteristics c cceccecececececeseeeseneseneseneseeeseneseeeseneseeeseneseeeseneseeeseeene 48 Interleaved 2 of 5 Style Ds e eee enel 48 Bidirectional Industrial 2 of 5 Styles 1 and 3 48 Matrix 2 or SUS Llica 49 Codes OF 9 Ste Ao een tenes eo ee eaten eee ete 49 zi mici m P 50 A eet oett Rc R eO UD ED EM E 50 Code 1 119lyle a e LM CH MEI 51 Godabar Ail Bin C Die 9 10 11 12 repre een ds 52 UPC A Style dalt rice dot eee auia ita siti Te eo e su eso edo ee DA 52 UPGC E Style T4 MIC E E 53 Code 93 SIyle A er AN 54 Code 126 SIvie 1G uia RD DE cuc uL E Cus 54 MS IS BVO Ta dE 55 POSTNET Style Olinda 56 Calculating the Checksum for Code 3 of 9 ssssssssss te 58 Calculating the Checksum for CODE 993 curae Le eo 58 Code 93 Checksums for Full ASCI cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeteeeeneeeeeeeneeteeeeneeteeeeess 60 Chapter 4 ANSI Oversized Fonts 63 Control F nction POETE Sco oo Ne a A a area LL hie 64 Oversized Control FUNCIONA Sia nun A aaa 64 Oversized Versus
85. light bar Center character code Yes NULL character Yes Intercharacter gap None Characters per symbol 13 Check digit The check digit can be supplied by the data source Delimiters Space comma horizontal tab hp relative 10 HR characters without guard bars Currently selected font special HR font special OCR A OCR B font 120 DPI only HR characters with guard bars OCR B font 11 CPI at default element widths 8 283 CO J O OI A O nm c 7265 Programmer s Manual 50 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes Code 11 Style 7 Bars per character 3 dark bars and 2 light bars Character set O through 9 and the dash character Start Stop characters Yes Center character code None NULL character Yes Intercharacter gap None Characters per symbol Variable Check digit If needed it must be generated by the data source Delimiters Space comma horizontal tab hp relative 0 HR characters Currently selected font special HR font special OCR A OCR B font 120 DPI only 0 O J O oy A Ww MH gt 11 CPI at default element widths 6 00 12 Combined start stop character length 0 306 7265 Programmer s Manual 51 Copyright 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes Codabar A t B n C D e 9 10 11 12 Bars per character 4 dark bars and 3 light bars Character set O through 9 and t
86. lofi Margin coa Kin e Ree Y qe 12 character density 12 cpi Elite 21 graphics characters activate deactivate 112 perforationskip s reo occat cress epon ia 10 reset perforation skip aoaaa ee 10 character density 10 cpi Pica 21 proportional spacing ON OFF 23 nghtmarin e 12 typestyle selection o 37 national character setselection 101 color Selection oo o o ooo 99 super subscript mode ON 29 half speed printing o o o o 97 condensedprint oo 20 enlarged print mode automatically reset after one line 18 Summary of Possible Codes A 5 Sequence ESC SP lt n gt ESC T ESC t lt 0 gt ESC t 1 ESC t 2 ESC U n ESC W lt n gt ESC w lt n gt ESC x lt n gt ESC Y lt n1 gt lt n2 gt ESC Z n1 n2 ESC X A 6 Summary of Possible Codes LQ850 LQ1050 FX80 FX100 FX85 FX105 FX850 FX1050 LQ850 LQ1050 LQ2500 LQ2550 LQ2170 SS NN SNSSNNNOOSNNSNNS NON SSSSSSS amp SS amp S SSSSSSSSSSS SSSSSSSSS amp S SSSSSSSSSSS SSSSSSSS amp S RARR SSSSSSS SSSSSSSSS amp S SSSSSSSSSSS amp SS SSSSSSSSSSSRSSSSSSSS SS A NSN EK SSSSSSSSS SSS SS Function Page character spacing lle 24 super subscript mode OFF 29 character set selection italic 103 character set selection graphics 10
87. lower or upper half of the code table Example The control code SI activates GO in the code range 21 7E and therefore loads GO in the lower half of the code table see also function Activation of Character Sets on page 79 Q This function causes a character set with 256 characters to be loaded by the control codes SO SI ESC n or ESC o Thus the activation of character sets with the using of the codes ESC ESC and ESC becomes ineffective o This function can be used for example to activate a table of PC code page tables O With this sequence the function set by CSI 50 h is turned off Thus the activation of character sets with 94 and 96 characters becomes effective again If the setting Character 8 0 to 9 F printable is active default setting ESC 53 I has to be sent instead of CSI 53 I because the CSI character is not accepted as control code 88 Miscellaneous Proportional Spacing Draft OFF CSI 51h Proportional Spacing Draft ON CSI 51 l Data Structure ASCII CSI 5 41 hh A disabling proportional spacing hex 9B 3F 35 31 68 in print quality DRAFT o dec 155 63 53 49 104 ASCII cain 5 q xl A enabling proportional spacing hex 9B 3F 35 31 69 in print quality DRAFT default o dec 155 63 53 49 105 Description O This sequence disables proportional spacing for the print quality DRAFT The printer switches automatically to NLQ if DRAFT and proportional spacing are selected
88. margin on the following form The horizontal position following a shear is the left margin The shear position should be set from the control panel so that paper is cut precisely at the perforation If a non zero top print reference is needed then set the top print reference first and then set the shear position Dec 27 91 49 59 49 32 123 Hex 1B 5B 31 3B 31 20 7B 7265 Programmer s Manual 13 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 2 ANSI Commands Descripton ESC 6 4 STRAPS AND OPTIONS POER This command enables downline control of options found at various places in the printer menus This includes the Emulation and Software Options menus as well as the User defined Options menu For details and descriptions see the User s Manual p3 0 1 p4 4 5 6 1 reset set auto cr on If auto If on cr auto cr on vt auto wrap 7265 Programmer s Manual Copyright 2004 TallyGenicom 14 Chapter 2 ANSI Graphics Rendition Fonts and Modes Command Description ESC p1 SELECT GRAPHICS RENDITION pn m Selects print modes and fonts p1 0 our 10 and 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 22 24 Printing Mode normal printing resets all modes but does not affect font selection set bold print set underline set doublewide set proportional Gothic DP Gothic LQ Courier DP Courier LQ Gothic Italic DP Gothic Italic LQ Courier Italic DP Courier Italic LQ Wid
89. modes Once set this code remains ef fective until it is reset by code DC2 O When the printer receives this code the condensed print mode is reset This code is ignored except when the printer has been set to condensed mode by SI or ESC SI CJ Proportionally spaced characters cannot be condensed Example 10 REM condensed character densities 20 LPRINT CHRS 15 this is condensed density 30 LPRINT CHR 18 and this is normal density 40 END this is condensed density and this is normal density 20 Character Spacing Character Density 10 cpi Character Density 12 cpi Character Density 15 cpi Data Structure Description p ASCII ESC P set character density to 10 cpi Pica 11 hex 1B 50 dec 27 80 ASCII ESC M set character density to 12 cpi Elite o hex 1B 4D dec 27 TT ASCII ESC g set character density to 15 cpi en e hex 1B 67 dec 27 103 Q This code sequence sets the character density to 10 cpi Pica This is also the default character density O This code sequence sets the character density to 12 cpi Elite This code sequence sets the character density to 15 cpi With this code sequence not only the character spacing is altered but also the size of the characters approx 2 3 mm high and 1 mm wide That is why the font set with this sequence is referred to as microfont All three control codes neutralise each other If the character spacing is changed using one of the sequences
90. no specifies the value of the right margin Print width 8 inches Print width 13 6 inches ny No 1 80 at 10 cpi 1 136 at 10 cpi 1 96 at 12 cpi 1 163 at 12 cpi 1 120 at 15 cpi 1 204 at 15 cpi 1 136 at 17 1 cpi 1 232 at 17 1 cpi 1 160 at 20 cpi 1 272 at 20 cpi Values for n4 No are valid for a line length of 8 inches 80 column printer or 13 6 inches 136 column printer set in the printer menu Example CSI ny S set left margin set right margin to default CSI s clear left and right margin CSI no S clear left margin set right margin The setting of the left and right margins depends on the current character density Any later setting of the character density will not influence the positions of the left and right margins on this page The unit depends on PUM and is either character positions or defined by the SSU func tion Select Size Unit see page 8 Paper and Text Formatting 11 Example 10 20 30 40 50 70 80 90 If only one margin is changed the other margin will be reset to default value If there are any logical problems for example left margin gt right margin the sequence is ignored REM left and right margin WIDTH LPT1 255 LPRINT CHR 27 10 53s LPRINT Now the left margin is set to column 10 and the LPRINT right margin is set to column 53 LPRINT CHR 27 5 41s LPRINT Now the left margin has been reduced to column 5 LPRINT and the
91. o le 65 graphics 120 dpi 2 p 2 o e 65 graphics 80 dpi len 65 graphics 240 dpi 2 es 65 Graphics 240 dpl ubica Pe a at 65 graphics 72 dpe iu a Rom Bo ae ae a ea S 65 graphics IO APM uote a YR RA ee A ae 65 right justification and centering OFF 14 emphasized mode ON 2 0 e 35 emphasized mode ON 2 2 ee o 35 MTPLcommandset 222r 80 end of command interpretations 0 80 start of Barcode interpretation lll 80 MTPL IBM Graphics Printer command set 80 MTPL IBM Proprinter XL command set 80 MTPL IBM Proprinter XL 24e command set 80 MTPL EPSON FX command set ls 80 size of character set 2 character sets 88 size of character set 1 character Set 88 proportional spacing Draft off 89 proportional spacing Draft on 0 89 font selection for NLQ LQ aoaaa 89 fontselectioni oder qoot eee A NR RA 89 print code area expansion ON 2 2 000 2 e ee 90 print code area expansion off lll 90 MTPL EPSON LQ command set 80 MTPL NEC P60 70 command set aoaaa aaa 80 direct setting of the print head distance default value 70 automatic gap adjustment OFF 0005 70 A 2 Summary of Possi
92. of sideways characters propagate left to right across the portrait page The printer makes line feeds for you by inserting space between the trailing cell boundary of the previous character and the leading cell boundary of the next character This space is 0 36 decipoints times the vertical expansion factor which is generous line spacing If this line spacing is not satisfactory then send sideways text one character at a time preceded by a locating command for each character If you use the resident line spacing for sideways lines then you will probably use a character array to rotate text In that case remember to fill your array with space characters 20 hex before you copy strings into it 7265 Programmer s Manual 72 Copyright 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 4 ANSI Oversized Appendix A Commands and Exceptions Supported Control Codes and Escape Sequences ACK BEL BS CR CSI DC1 DC3 DEL ENQ ESC ESC or ST ESC c ESC D or IND ESC E or NEL ESC H or HTS ESC Jor VTS ESC K or PLD ESC L or PLU ESC Mor RI ESC P data or DCS ESC p1 pn ESC p1 pn m ESC p1 p2 SP B ESC p1 p2 s ESC p1 pn u ESC p1 png ESC p1 pnv ESC p1 p2 p3r ESC p1 p2 lt SP gt G ESC p1 pn h ESC p1 pnl ESC p1 ESC pia ESC pid ESC p1 j ESC pik ESC piq ESC pit ESC p1 p2f ESC pie ETX Acknowledge Bell Back Space Carriage Return Control String Introducer ESC Select p
93. off Dec 15 Hex OF 7265 Programmer s Manual 37 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes p1 Bar Code Style This printer supports the following styles p1 Style 0 Interleaved 2 of 5 1 Bidirectional 2 of 5 2 Matrix 2 of 5 3 Industrial 2 of 5 4 Code 3 of 9 default 5 EAN 8 6 EAN 13 7 Code 11 9 Codabar a t see note 10 Codabar b n see note 11 Codabar c see note 12 Codabar d e see note 13 UPC A 14 UPC E 15 Code 93 16 Code 128 subsets A B and C 17 Reserved 18 Reserved 19 MSI 50 POSTNET Note Each of the four Codabar styles will accept any combination of valid start stop characters that you send If you do not send any start stop characters then the printer generates start stop characters according to the style in force p2 Height Height of the bar code in 1 12 inch increments The default is inch which corresponds to an argument of 9 Caution In some versions of the printer the last non zero value of p13 supplants all subsequent values of p2 until you ISU that printer See page 41 7265 Programmer s Manual 38 Copyright 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes p3 Human Readable Enable An argument of 1 turns on the human readable line while O turns it off The default is on When the human readable line is enabled it is printed in the font specified by parameter p12 There i
94. or 15 cpi character DPQ LQ If the download character is only being assigned one character code specify x y Limitations for do d4 and d print quality do dj de do d1 d2 DPQ 10 cpi 20 lt 12 20 lt 12 DPQ 12 cpi 20 lt 10 20 lt 10 DPQ 15 cpi 20 lt 8 20 lt 8 LQ 10 cpi 20 lt 36 20 lt 36 LQ 12 cpi 20 lt 30 20 lt 30 LQ 15 cpi 20 lt 24 gt 0 lt 24 LQ proportional 20 lt 42 20 lt 42 LQ super subscript gt 20 lt 37 20 lt 37 If defined character density 10 12 15 cpi is selected dy and d will be ignored and the defined character is centered If more columns than dy will be defined for one character it is printed more to the right and can overlap the next character The absolute limit for d4 is 15 columns in DPQ and 42 columns in LQ 92 Download Character Generator For LQ proportional only it is necessary to define all 41 columns column 42 should be free All other print modes use the number of columns as defined by d4 Superscript and subscript characters and 15 cpi characters can be assigned needles 1 to 16 The super and sub shifting will be done by corresponding escape sequence If the same needle is set to print adjacent columns the printer will ignore one of them i e it will print in alternating order Example Needles 1 e o o o 0 6 128 2 e e 64 3 e e 32 4 e e ni 16 5 e e Byte 1 8
95. recommended to set the bar width equal to the space width xy 3 Printer dependent reference value 12 Barcode Printing All values are only valid when a new colour ribbon is used They change depending on the degree of wear m narrow bar approx 0 05 mm m narrow space approx 0 05 mm The Code EAN 128 as the EAN UPC is based on module widths Therefore only the X parameter is valid for this type This parameter is also used for the Y parameter narrow bar width The Z parameter has no meaning In combination with the normal condensed feature 8 widths result see table 1 Error Code Wrong characters in a control code or in a barcode test e g an undefined character in a certain barcode Type cause the barcode error sign to be printed Barcode Printing 13 Data Formats of Barcode Types Code 2 5 Matrix Type A Syntax Figures n Start code Stop code ASCII o to 9 yug Lou hex 30 to 39 3A 3A dec 48 to 57 58 58 Data Structure ASCII DC4 Startcode n n Stop code DC4 hex 14 Startcode n n Stopcode 14 dec 20 Startcode n n Stopcode 20 Example 10 REM code 2 5 matrix barcode 20 LPRINT CHR 27 11 30 LPRINT CHR 26 A3 111 CHRS 25 40 LPRINT CHR 20 123 CHR 20 50 LPRINT CHR 27 10 14 Barcode Printing Code 2 5 Industrial Type B Syntax Data Structure Example Figures n Start code Stop code ASCII o to 9
96. selected The upper half contains control codes and italic characters d4 1or49 Character table 1 Table 437 The Epson Graphic Character Set is selected The upper half contains international and graphic characters see IBM Character Set 2 from hex AO to hex FF d 20r50 Character table 2 DLL The upper half contains user defined characters if created by ESC amp When creating characters assign code value in the range of O to 127 For using add 128 to the codes Using of n 2 without user defined characters causes same contents of upper and lower half of the character code table di 3or5 Character table 3 Table 437 The IBM Code Page Table 437 is selected user defined character set Miscellaneous 103 o You can either register O 3 Register 3 is only available in ESC P2 mode The command ESC t can be used to assign character sets to character table d1 If d1 2 you cannot use user defined characters defined previously with ESC t see page 105 Example 10 REM upper half of code table 20 LPRINT CHRS 27 t0 30 GOSUB 90 40 LPRINT CHRS 27 t1 50 GOSUB 90 60 LPRINT CHR 27 t2 70 GOSUB 90 80 END 90 RESTORE 100 FOR I 1 TO 15 110 READ D 120 LPRINT CHRS D 130 NEXT I 140 LPRINT 150 RETURN 160 DATA 65 66 67 68 69 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 ABCDEX amp ABCDE 20 r TARA ABCDE E J 104 Miscellaneous Assign Cha
97. that also support any user adjustment of bar code widths some enable the specification of module width while others such as this one enable the adjustment of element widths From the programmer s point of view adjustable module widths tend to guarantee that the ratio among element widths remains correct while adjustable element widths afford more flexibility When we ship the printer the ratios among element widths in a given bar code style are within generic specifications for that style You can restore these default element widths by performing an initial setup ISU as described in the User s manual Since this printer lets you specify element widths independently of each other it is possible to print bar codes that are outside of generic specifications or outside of the limits of your particular reading system or both You need to know the requirements of your system before you program your printer Bar codes printed with this printer are suitable for readers designed for low or medium density bar code symbols Avoid readers with apertures smaller than 7 mils If bar codes are to be read with an infrared reader then you must use a special carbon ribbon The examples given in this section use the Code 3 of 9 format 7265 Programmer s Manual 33 Copyright 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes Before You Begin Set the Form Length Programmers tend not to trust form feeds and sometimes use line feeds instead to move from
98. the possibility to design your own characters in normal print mode DPQ in NLQ NLQ proportional LQ and LQ proportional These characters can either represent modified characters of the printer s internal character sets or can replace other characters These special characters symbols etc can be defined in the Download Character Gen erator and then called download characters DLL You can define and store in the prin ters memory a maximum of 96 DLL characters 02 DC2 03 DC3 04 DC4 08 BS CAN OB VT ESC OF SI DEL printable characters If only single characters of an internal character set should be changed it is possible to copy the internal character set to the Download Character Generator and redefine these single characters o After power switch off or initialization of the printer the contents of the Download Character Generator is lost Download characters are possible in draft print quality DPQ near letter quality NLQ and in letter quality LQ Download Character Generator 73 To define download characters it is helpful to do this in a defined way m Draft print quality or letter quality or letter quality proportional characters Superscript or subscript character 12 cpi or 15 cpi character DPQ LQ o The desired print mode DPQ or LQ or LQ proportional must be selected in the printer m Loa
99. the printer goes BUSY The big character as well as a buffer full of following objects has to be printed before the printer goes READY again If the host now tries for some period of time to send data to the printer without seeing a READY at the interface then the host might decide that the printer is not working show you a device timeout message and abort the data transfer This same possibility exists with large bar codes and we discuss remedies in the ANSI Bar Code chapter 7265 Programmer s Manual 67 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 4 ANSI Oversized What is a Character Cell A character cell is the rectangular array of locations at which dots can be printed to form one character All character cells for a given monospaced font at a given pitch are the same size If you print a line of characters with no countermanding motion instructions then no character cell will impinge horizontally on the character cell of an adjacent character You can determine character cell width in a monospaced font by measuring the distance from the leading edge of say an uppercase E to the leading edge of an adjacent uppercase E In an impact matrix printer font the printed portion of a character is often centered horizontally in the character cell There might be a fixed number of dot columns on either end of the character cell that are never printed This is analogous to the side bearings in a typeset character Figure 4 2 Charac
100. to initial state reset to initial state right justification and centering OFF right justification and centering OFF right justification ON select font set bit 8 0 set bit 8 1 set bit 8 unchanged set horizontal tab stop set horizontal tab stop A 12 Summary of Possible Codes Sequence Page OSIRIS 6 ste ay re hee oo a o add 80 ESTA e halte eeu hes Qu eae s 80 ESTAS DEX Qu 80 OS ara oo She a remise de es e RE E la 98 ESC a xu S rd E eA M t e 98 ESTAY Lt BA Sua M Meus ns 31 GS dy A a aA 31 CSS M EC 31 9S 22 mt ze Su RTL d e RE VEU 72 CSI31m na lle 76 CS Sou xt Ate nts NE ee ke iM ads AE 40 CSI 59 M ete cate a e Hsu Gece er IY 40 CSI Psi Ps2Ps3Pn4Pn5 VW 71 CSI 53 hr i afa s uum eid 90 GSI 53 be tet e o ER et dde re tire 90 CSI Pmnmc SPEM VE nune RES Beza 90 CSI 505m Sec omen edt tuse ees nest 37 AS EN 37 GSA y s tA m de AA LANE I Es 37 GSL 28 io scuole A o 37 CSI 5I hr eee REA RR REESE 89 CSI ZENA vm te uen eure sce ebd i 89 CSI SP usua a oe Be aid 21 CSU aise RT ED E A E 92 CAOC ae iid aru eae dedo aeu mi a t 91 CSL OTI erus Ao dE ees ms x 72 ESPOSA eh ies Ree BE e ba 79 ESCIO Ms e des A t 79 GSI PY eder ar an ia DR NE 14 OS Ve ias nnus Gon ene IR Pes eerte 14 ESTOY Ls uu dae Licini eie 14 CSIni n2SPD sn 43 ESB ZA Lt mod E Se See te en de 74 CSIO Z a onte ants eere e ates 74 oi P Behe oe tt eek Stays 74 GSU AUS os ok ee ee BAe Pe AL a 46 ESC fe oho
101. typeface and are as given in the manual with the exception that 5 is OCR B and 6 is OCR A 0 Roman 1 Sans Serif 2 Courier 4 Script 5 OCR B 6 OCR A 7 Modern 8 Kaufmann 9 Gothic 10 Helvette 11 Quadrato 66 Courier IBM The upper eight bits Only bits 9 512H and 11 2048H are used All the other bits must be left at 0 Bits 9 and 11 set print quality Bit 11 Bit 9 0 0 Letter Quality 0 1 Draft 1 0 Near Letter Quality 1 1 Reserved When Draft 01 is selected the lower eight bits have a new meaning 0 Multicopy Draft 1 Fast Draft 2 Normal Draft to specify a type face with a print quality add the decimal values and convert to an ASCII string Example 1 CourierLQ 00 2 Number 2 Example 2 Script NLQ 10 2048 4 Number 2052 Example 3 Draft 01 512 1 Number 513 So CSI7 513 D i e 9B 37 3B 35 31 33 20 44H or ESC 7 513 D i e 1B 5B 37 3B 35 31 33 20 44 H will put Fast Draft in font register 7 The sequence ESC 17m will select this register as the font to use 44 Character Styling Print Positioning Horizontal Tab Stop HT Data Structure ASCII HT A horizontal tab stop hex 09 dec 9 Description The HT Code moves the active print position to the next horizontal tabulation stop on the same line If there is no tab stop reachable no more tab stops are set or the next tab stop is beyond the defined right margin spaces are inserted The graphic renditions e g underlining over
102. underlined 70 END the most important word must be underlined Character Styling 39 Overline Mode ON SGR Overline Mode OFF CSI 53 m CSI 55 m Data Structure ASCII CSI 5 S m A overline mode ON hex 9B 35 33 6D dec 155 53 51 109 ASCII CSI 5 5 m A overline mode OFF hex 9B 35 35 6D dec 155 53 53 109 Description This sequence switches the automatic overline function on or off When the automatic overline function is on all printed characters including spaces are automatically under lined also see SGR Underline Mode ON previous page 39 o The sequence CSI 0 m resets all CSI m sequences A maximum of 16 CSI m sequences can be joined in one sequence e g as follows CSI n1 no inx m 40 Character Styling Double Strike ON Double Strike OFF Data Structure ASCII CSI 9g w B C double strike print mode ON hex 9B 39 77 dec 155 57 119 ASCII CSI 8 w B C double strike print mode OFF hex 9B 38 77 dec 155 56 119 Description In double strike mode characters are printed twice in two printing passes Double strike mode can be used in all print qualities and character densities Double strike mode can also be used in combination with emphasized mode The use of this sequence in combination with LQ and emphasized printing is not recommended Example 10 REM double strike 20 LPRINT CHR 27 8w 30 LPRINT this is normal printing 40 LPRINT CHR 27 9w 50 LPRINT and thi
103. 0 Default value 18 70 Miscellaneous Paper Handling CSI Ps1 Ps2 Ps3 Pn4 Pn5 v Data Structure ASCII CSI Psi Ps2 Ps3 Pn4 Pn5 y hex 9B Psi Ps2 Ps3 Pn4 Pn5 2B 76 dec 155 Ps1 Ps2 Ps3 Pn4 Pn5 43 118 Description Ps1 missing or 0 Printhead does not lift off at the fold 1 Printhead lifts off at the fold Ps2 missing or 0 Printhead position at left margin during paper movement allowed 1 Printhead position at left margin during paper movement not allowed Ps3 missing or 0 Printhead position at right margin during paper movement allowed 1 Printhead position at right margin during paper movement not allowed Pn4 missing or lt 20 or gt 136 No limitation of print width 20 136 Print width in 1 10 inch Pn5 missing or 0 or gt 30 No displacement of the start of the print area left margin 1 20 Displacement of the start of the print area in 1 10 inches Shared Interface CSI Pn w Data Structure ASCII CSI Pn w hex 9B Pn 2B 77 dec 155 Pn 43 119 Description Sequence to set hold time of shared I O after selecting alternate interface Pn missing or 0 Sequence ignored Pn 1 30 Hold time in seconds db Shared I O has to be selected in the printer s menu Default 30 s Miscellaneous 71 Color Selection Option CSI m Data Structure ASCII CSI n m A set colors hex 9B n 6D dec 155 n 109 Description For n the following parameters are available n hex dec color selection 0 30 48 reset color
104. 1 p2 f Vertical and Horizontal Position Absolute ESC Ps g Clear Tabs ESC p1 pn h Set Auto CR on LF ESC gt p1 pn h Set Mode GENICOM ESC p j Horizontal Position Backwards ESC p k Vertical Position Backwards ESC p1 pn I Reset Auto CR on LF ESC gt p1 pn I Reset Mode GENICOM ESC P1 Pn m Fonts and Print Modes SGR ESC p1 p Select Paper Path ESC p1 q Select Graphics Density ESC p1 p2 p3 r Forms Setup ESC p1 p2 s Sets Left and Right Margins ESC p1 t ENA DIS Oversized Expanded Bar Code ESC p1 p2 p22 u Set Horizontal Tabs at Certain Positions ESC p1 p2 p12 v Set Vertical Tabs at Certain Positions ESC p1 p2 Set Bar Code Parameters ESC p x National Character Sets 7265 Programmer Manual Copyright 2004 TallyGenicom Pr inter Handshaking Commands Description DC1 PRINTER READY In serial interface if the printer is strapped for XON XOFF handshaking then the printer sends DC1 to the host to signal that the printer is ready to accept data In parallel interface if the printer is strapped for select deselect by received DC1 DC3 codes then the host sends DC1 to the printer to set the printer online Dec 17 Hex 11 DC3 PRINTER NOT READY In serial interface if the printer is strapped for XON XOFF handshaking then the printer sends DC3 to the host to signal that the printer cannot for the moment accept an
105. 1 31 49 bold or increased intensity 2 32 50 alternate color or decreased intensity o 22 32 32 50 50 cancels functions of parameters 1 and 2 normal color or normal intensity 30 3330 51 48 black 31 33 31 51 49 red 32 33 32 51 50 green 33 3333 51 51 yellow o 34 3334 51 52 blue 35 3335 51 53 magenta red o 36 3336 5154 cyan blue o 39 33 39 5157 default color blac 0 red or magenta depending on the ribbon used o only available with multi color ribbon The available colors depend on the ribbon used and must be matched in the menu If a ribbon with several black tracks is used then it is automatically switched every new page between the tracks The relationship between tracks and colors is shown in the following table track yellow cyan red green blue black 3 black red magenta black RGBK 1 black black black 2 cyan blue black 3 magenta green black 4 yellow red red 72 Miscellaneous Example qp The relationship between color selection sequences and the resulting colors for several ribbon cassettes is shown in the following table selected yellow magenta cyan red green blue 3 black red color black black black black black black red red red red green green green TERR yellow yellow green raps blue blue blue none magenta magenta red red cyan cyan blue I2 green yellow cyan blue magent
106. 2 To summarize when using our cpi figures to predict the length of a symbol remember e Allow for two quiet zones per symbol e For variable length symbols allow the combined start stop character length for each symbol e f you use a check character then allow for the check character 7265 Programmer s Manual 47 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes Bar Code Style Characteristics The following pages show specific information about the various styles A NULL character is a combination of bars and spaces unique to a particular style that is printed when a nonvalid character is encountered in received bar code symbol data A null character in the symbol shows up as a diamond in the human readable line if the HRL is enabled Interleaved 2 of 5 Style 0 1 Bars per unit 2 characters 5 dark bars and 5 light bars 2 Character set 0 through 9 3 Start character 2 dark bars and 2 light bars Stop character 2 dark bars and 1 light bar Center character code None NULL character Yes Intercharacter gap None Characters per symbol Variable Check digit None Delimiters Space comma horizontal tab hp_relative 0 HR characters Currently selected font special HR font special OCR A OCR B font 120 DPI only 11 CPI at default element widths 6 857 12 Combined start stop character length 0 167 O o NID OI A Bidirectional Industrial 2 of 5 Styles 1 and 3
107. 27 S CHRS 1 2 CHRS 27 T 90 LPRINT O is simply water 100 END E Mx C is Einsteins most famous formula H20 is simply water 30 Character Styling Double Strike ON Double Strike OFF Data Structure Description Example ASCII ESC G double strike ON 1 hex 1B 47 dec 27 71 ASCII ESC H double strike OFF O hex 1B 48 dec 27 72 O This code sequence switches the printer to double strike mode In double strike mode characters are printed in two printing passes at the same horizontal position thus print appears thicker and fuller Print speed is reduced since the characters are printed twice Double strike mode can be used in combination with emphasized mode ESC E Double strike mode is reset when the printer receives the code sequence ESC H O This code sequence resets the double strike mode set by ESC G or ESC I This code sequence is ignored when the printer is not in double strike mode 10 REM double strike 20 LPRINT CHR 27 H 30 LPRINT this is normal printing 40 LPRINT CHRS 27 G 50 LPRINT and this is double strike printing 60 END this is normal printing and this is double strike printing Character Styling 31 Select Font and Pitch by Point ESC X Data Structure ASCII ESC X m nj ny select font and pitch by point hex 1B 58 m nj lt ny gt dec 27 88 lt m gt nj ny Description Valid values 5 lt m lt 127 m 0 1 0 lt n lt 255 0 lt ny
108. 3 character set selection download 103 unidirectional printing ON OFF 96 continuous enlarged print mode ON OFF 18 double height 46 print quality e 34 high speed graphics 120 dpi 63 graphics 240 dpi o o o o ooo ooo 63 select font by pitch and point 32 A A oe a a nak wae aN x aed 117 horizontal 4 o Pace ty tem es 117 liie feed uua aa RES 117 ASCII characterQ oo oo 117 condensed print ON 000005 20 enlarged print mode automatically reset after one line 18 ASCII character 1 Start Of Heading 118 O NN 118 Vertical tab 2 Poot ab e X ux 118 Sorted by Functions Function absolute horizontal step ASCII character 0 assign character table back feed n 216 inch bell character density 10 cpi Pica character density 12 cpi Elite character density 15 cpi character set selection character spacing clear all horizontal tab stops clear all tab settings color selection condensed print condensed print ON continuous enlarged print mode ON OFF control code BS Backspace control code CAN Cancel control code CR Carriage Return control code DEL Delete control code ESC Escape copy ROM character generator define download characters 24 needle version define draft download characters 9 needle version define NLQ download characters 9 needle version direct
109. 30 LPRINT CHRS 27 s CHRS 1 REM set half speed 40 LPRINT This is half speed print in LQ mode 50 LPRINT Quiet Mode 60 LPRINT CHRS 27 s CHRS 0 REM Set full speed 70 LPRINT CHRS 27 x CHRS 0 REM Set draft mode 80 LPRINT This is full speed print in draft mode 90 LPRINT CHR 27 s CHRS 1 REM set half speed 100 LPRINT This is half speed print in draft mode 110 LPRINT Quiet Mode 120 LPRINT CHR 28 Q Resets printer 130 END This is full speed print in LQ mode This is half speed print in LQ mode Quiet Mode This is full speed print in draft mode This is half speed print in draft mode Quiet Mode Miscellaneous 97 Single n 180 Inch or n 216 Inch Line Feed Single n 180 Inch or n 216 Inch Back Feed Data Structure ASCII ESC J n n 180 inch line feed ED o hex 1B 4A lt n gt n 216 inch line feed dec 27 74 lt n gt ASCII ESC j n n 180 inch back feed ED e hex 1B 6A lt n gt n 216 inch back feed E dec 27 106 n Description O When the printer receives this code sequence it advances the paper by 480 inches 24 needle printer or by 216 inches 9 neadle printer This sequence does not effect a CR reset line pointer When the printer receives this code sequence it moves the paper backwards by 80 inches 24 needle printer or by 0216 inches 9 needle printer Unlike an ordinary line feed code code ESC J does not advance the paper to the top of the next page when t
110. 32 76 Description For n the following parameters are available n hex dec vertical spacing 0 30 48 6 Ipi 1 31 49 4 pi 2 32 50 3 Ipi 3 33 51 12 Ipi 4 34 52 8 Ipi 9 39 57 2 Ipi qp Note that changing the line spacing also changes the number of lines per page Changing of line spacing does not affect the form length set before hand 24 Line Spacing Line Density 6 Ipi Line Density 8 Ipi Data Structure ASCII CSI 9 2 C line density 6 Ipi line spacing 1 6 inch hex 9B 33 7A dec 155 51 122 ASCII CSI 4 2 C line density 8 Ipi line spacing 1 8 inch hex 9B 34 7A dec 155 52 122 Description These sequences set the line spacing to inch 6 Ipi line density or 1 inch 8 Ipi line density Note that changing the line spacing also changes the number of lines per page Changing of line spacing does not affect the current vertical tab stops or form length Example 10 REM line spacin 20 LPRINT CHRS 27 4z 30 LPRINT these two lines are printed with 40 LPRINT a spacing of 1 8 inch 50 LPRINT 60 LPRINT CHRS 27 3z 70 LPRINT these two lines are printed with 80 LPRINT a spacing of 1 6 inch 90 END these two Lines are prentes with a spacing of 1 8 inc these two Lines are printed with a spacing of 1 6 inch Line Spacing 25 Set Line Spacing SLS CSI SP h Data Structure ASCII CSI n SP h A set line spacing hex 9B n 20 68 dec 155 n 32 104 Description n specifies the line spacing T
111. 4 Startcode n n Stopcode 14 dec 20 Startcode n n Stopcode 20 10 REM code 11 barcode 20 LPRINT CHRS 27 2 11 30 LPRINT CHR 26 D3 111 CHR 25 40 LPRINT CHR 20 123 CHR 20 50 LPRINT CHRS 27 10 Barcode Printing 17 Code BCD Matrix Type E Syntax Figures n Start code Stop code ASCII o to 9 enn vm hex 30 to 39 3A 3A dec 48 to 57 58 58 Data Structure ASCII DC4 Startcode n n Stop code DC4 hex 14 Startcode n n Stopcode 14 dec 20 Startcode n n Stopcode 20 Example 10 REM BCD matrix code barcode 20 LPRINT CHR 27 11 30 LPRINT CHR 26 E3 111 CHRS 25 40 LPRINT CHR 20 123 CHR 20 50 LPRINT CHR 27 10 18 Barcode Printing Syntax Data Structure Example Numbers Character n Start code Stop code not fixed not fixed recommended recommended ASCII o to 9 A to Zn and Wee xw 9o TEE AE EM a hex 30 to 39 41 to 5A and 2A 2A 24 25 2A 2B 2D 2E 2F dec 48 to 57 65 to 90 and 42 42 36 37 42 43 45 46 47 ASCII DC4 Startcode n n Stopcode DC4 hex 14 Startcode n n Stopcode 14 dec 20 Startcode n n Stopcode 20 10 REM code 39 barcode 20 LPRINT CHR 27 11 30 LPRINT CHR 26 F3 111 CHR 25 40 LPRINT CHRS 20 123 CHRS 20 50 LPRINT CHRS 27 210 Barcode Printing 19 CODABAR Type G Syntax N
112. 48 font 0 11 3131 49 49 font 1 12 31 32 49 50 font 2 13 31 33 49 51 font 3 14 3134 49 52 font 4 15 31 35 49 53 font 5 16 31 36 49 54 font 6 17 3137 49 55 font 7 18 31 38 49 56 font 8 19 31 39 49 57 font 9 0 30 48 clear all selected fonts Depending on the value specified for n one of the internal printer fonts or a font of an optional font card is selected Refer to the Operator s Manual for information on printer resident fonts and font cards which can be installed The order of the font 0 to font 9 not corresponds to the fonts displayed on your printer The sequence and allocation is defined by the sequence CSI ny n2 SP D see FNT Font Selection page 43 A maximum of 16 CSI m sequences can be joined in one sequence e g as follows CSI n4 n2 nx m Character Styling 33 Example Valid for most MTPL printers Fontregister Font o o 0 Ci 2 ON o 34 Character Styling Draft NLQ Courier LQ Courier NLQ Sans Serif LQ Sans Serif LQ Roman LQ Script LQ Prestige LQ OCR B LQ OCR A Emphasized Mode ON Emphasized Mode OFF Data Structure Description Example ASCII CSI hex 9B dec 155 ASCII CSI hex 9B dec 155 3D 61 gt 3E 62 Z C emphasized mode ON 2 C emphasized mode OFF 7A 122 During printing in emphasized mode each dot is printed twice slightly shifted in horizon tal direction Emphasized mode can be used in all print qualities and character
113. 6 e e 4 7 e e 2 8 e 1 9 e e 128 10 e e 64 11 e e 32 12 e e n2 16 13 e e Byte 2 8 14 e e o o oe O 4 15 e e 2 16 e 1 17 e e 128 18 e e 64 19 e e 32 20 e e o o o O n3 16 21 e e Byte 3 8 22 e e 4 23 e e 2 24 e 1 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 301 311 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 Code 1 15 16 32 64 128 o 128 0 128 o 128 0 128 o 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Code 2 2550 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 128 6132 1 8 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 8 Code 3 0 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 2 4 8 16 0 16 0 16 0 16 0 16 O 240 Download Character Generator 93 Example 10 REM Download Character Definition 20 LPRINT CHRS 27 x1 30 LPRINT CHRS 27 amp CHRS b 40 LPRINT CHRS 5 CHRS 30 ARR A 50 LPRINT CHRS 15 ae sae pr 60 LPRINT CHR 16 per A RET 128 70 LPRINT CHRS 32 CHRS 0 CHR 64 80 LPRINT CHRS 64 CHRS 0 HRS 32 90 LPRINT CHRS 128 CHRS 0 CHRS 16 100 LPRINT CHRS 0 CHRS 0 CHRS 8 110 LPRINT CHRS 128 CHRS 0 CHRS 4 120 LPRINT CHRS 0 CHRS 0 CHRS 2 130 LPRINT CHRS 128 CHRS 0 CHRS 1 140 LPRINT CHRS 0 CHRS 0 CHRS 0 150 LPRINT CHRS 128 CHRS 0 CHRS 1 160 LPRINT CHRS 0 CHRS 0 CHRS 0 170 LPRINT CHRS 128 CHRS 0
114. 83 ESC E s n de teat actae dl ete Rad 83 ESQ FS tate ia m vs mter BG ca T 83 ESQuEE llus Eee d cvi EVE Ua 83 CSENG es e A aco IR od d 92 ESO D Sor xe te eo ot ee CIR RC ne ei e Re 92 GSB es reae ien atu err ER dern 92 GSL0 3 V Low ate ws Fe fee bok uet 70 GS oue hd net eee ta hex E eae t 70 CSZ Z 5 coude A eS s 29 CAB ZA da 29 CSl27 i A oen a 29 CSL8 Wis e e dene voe RE del deci 41 SL Ct ute tos ase S Gated UE ud oL es 41 GSI 24i hr A SR it AUD Rn 39 OSA Wm etie xr uk derer tan dicia 31 Sidi i Cu wet aria PP ad ot aiat Heaths bs 76 CS Zee bik us ara worse uu 35 ecc m 2 in te te de ae 35 CSI 10 9 4 eee eto a i 80 GSL5W NT ei Soo IIS 76 CSIs Lo due TRE 31 CSI TOm us mares a a bee 33 Summary of Possible Codes A 9 Function font 1 font 2 font 3 font 4 font 5 font 6 font 7 font 8 font 9 font selection for NLQ LQ font selection form lenght in lines graphic size modification graphic size selection graphics 120 dpi graphics 240 dpi graphics 240 dpi graphics 60 dpi graphics 72 dpi graphics 80 dpi graphics 90 dpi graphics invers graphics normal high print quality high resolution print quality horizontal character spacing 10 cpi horizontal character spacing 15 cpi horizontal character spacing 6 cpi horizontal character spacing 6 cpi Horizontal Motion Index horizontal position absolute horizontal position backward horizontal position relative horizontal spacing 10 cpi horizontal spac
115. 9 GS Im anna bee AP CERO at BRA 39 GSI ide se ate Set len aded pe Sede we 57 CSINK 50s uA IE uerchowpE ean 59 CSW s xou Sax Bats sace fe 58 GSL3 SPiliv4 a ch or ae S e o dioe 24 CSL9 S PE oe A dur a 24 AA O Ee iren ms 24 CSI SP uus od Erb ba a e 24 CSEO SP E e usu a a meu 24 GSP4 SP T LR Bon Pe eee ee E 24 S aes exor vac ur AP a O RI Ra qa ab Sapa andl 52 Summary of Possible Codes A 13 Appendix B Character Sets Standard Character Set A do co eo o al t3 j P4 3 dl 40 oe g Ex o o oo N o N 00 e o R o e oo al N o Oo N m A N N 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 N wo oo o I R NI a N o N Y I 002 m 80 N aLe m QA t oL aL t nm Mm 0500 gt O 0 0 a OQ NM NI o For the contents of the shaded areas see table at page B 3 B 2 Character Sets International Substitution Table normal font USA Great Britain Sweden Germany Portugal France Italy o amp OF Qr oF A r Spain Hilo MH HH GR Hon ou Hw Ae AAA A Mm Mo Mm Mm m m A 200 000 17 Die t w A COD Qe OG om O ala mw Norway 8 dh The contents of the columns 8 and 9 depend on the setting
116. CHR 27 3 5 9v 50 LPRINT CHR 11 this is the first vertical tab line 3 60 LPRINT CHR 11 this is the second vertical tab line 5 70 LPRINT CHR 11 this is the third vertical tab line 9 80 END this is the first vertical tab line 3 this is the second vertical tab line 5 this is the third vertical tab line 9 Print Positioning 53 Horizontal Posititon Absolute HPA CSI Data Structure ASCII CSI n Eom A set horizontal position absolute hex 9B n 60 dec 155 n 96 Description n 2 1 defaultsetting current left margin This sequence moves the print head to a horizontal print position absolute The unit depends on PUM Positioning Unit Mode and is either character positions or defined by the SSU function Select Size Unit see page 8 Example CSI 40 next character goes to position 40 CSI next character goes to the left margin QD Positions outside the right margin are ignored Make sure you do not confuse the character with the apostrophe 54 Print Positioning Horizontal Position Relative HPR CSI a Data Structure Description ASCII CSI n a A set horizontal position relative hex CSI n 61 dec CSI n 97 n 1 default setting This sequence moves the print head to the right The unit depends on PUM Positioning Unit Mode and is either character positions or defined by the SSU function Select Size Unit see page 8 Example CSI8a next chara
117. CHRS 27 10zscript CHR 27 2z is printed in the base line E MxC is Einsteins most famous formula H0 is simply water MicrOs cziopcis printed in the base Line 28 Character Styling Double Height ON Upper Half CSI 12 z Double Height ON Lower Half CSI 13 z Double Height OFF CSI 2z Data Structure ASCII CSI 4 2 2 C double height ON upper half o hex 9B 31 32 7A dec 155 49 50 122 ASCII CSI Q9 2 C double height ON lower half o hex 9B 31 33 7A dec 155 49 51 122 ASCII CSI 2 2 A double height OFF 2 hex 9B 32 7A dec 155 50 122 Description O The same character must be sent to both lines to form a full character Afterwards double height must be reset If only a part of the line is printed double height the posi tioning of upper lower half must be done by spaces The line spacing should be set to V6 inch O This sequence also resets superscript subscript and microscript O Note For selection of double height together with the proportional mode or other print attributes the start of printing has to be identic for the top and bottom half Character Styling 29 Example 10 REM double height 20 LPRINT For CHR 27 12zHeadlines CHRS 27 2z 30 LPRINT printing in double 40 LPRINT CHR S 27 13z Headlines CHRS 27 2z 50 LPRINT height is recommended 60 END For Headlines printing in double height is recommended 30 Character Styling Print Quality CSI
118. Code Height Wide Bar Width Narrow Bar Width Parameter p2 Parameter p5 Parameter p4 Human Readable Narrow Space Wide Space Width Line Parameter p3 Width Parameter p6 Parameter p7 Figure 3 1 Parts of a Bar Code 7265 Programmer s Manual 35 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes Values of all the adjustable bar code parameters are stored in NVRAM while power is off You can restore the bar code attributes to the factory settings by performing an ISU on the printer pn Attribute p1 style p2 height p3 human readable line enable p4 narrow bar width p5 wide bar width p6 narrow space width p wide space width p8 N A p9 rotation p10 horizontal print density p11 check character p12 human readable font p13 height in 1 24 increments General Rules for Assigning Parameters You can send the sequence to modify bar code parameters any time except when bar code mode is active If you assign a parameter value outside the permissible range then that parameter value reverts to the default value Values for narrow bars must be less than values for wide bars Values for narrow spaces must be less than values for wide spaces The ratio between wide and narrow elements should be about 3 1 As with other ANSI escape sequences that take multiple parameters you can use the semicolon as a place holder when you want to change
119. ESCENAS ro ei ous dudes de Roa um ae dtes 35 Summary of Possible Codes A 7 Function form feed form length in inches form length in lines graphics 120 dpi graphics 120 dpi graphics 120 dpi graphics 120 dpi graphics 144 dpi graphics 180 dpi graphics 240 dpi graphics 240 dpi graphics 360 dpi graphics 60 dpi graphics 60 dpi graphics 60 dpi graphics 72 dpi graphics 80 dpi graphics 90 dpi graphics 90 dpin graphics characters activate deactivate half speed printing high speed graphics 120 dpi horizontal and vertical step forward horizontal and vertical step width horizontal tab horizontal tab stops input data control bit 8 unchanged input data control bit 8 0 input data control bit 8 1 italic mode OFF italic mode ON justification and centering left margin line feed line feed n 216 inch line feed n72 inch A 8 Summary of Possible Codes Sequence Page EE Ac eke noted Re BB Rie A do a 117 ESC G NUL nsc dei wwe of Sea Pace et es 5 ESC Cicer een ten A 5 ESC lt 1 gt lt ni gt lt n2 gt occ 63 ESC lt 33 gt lt n1 gt lt N2 gt 0 enn 63 ESCL nis n2s fee ep hw eB ee a ee io 63 ESC Y lt ni gt lt n2 gt 2 ee 63 ESC lt 7 gt lt ni gt lt n2 gt cc 63 ESC lt 39 gt lt ni gt lt n2 gt ccoo 63 ESC lt 3 gt lt ni gt lt n2 gt co 63 ESC Z lt ni gt lt n2 gt a a a ooo ooo 63 ESC lt 40 gt lt ni gt lt n2 gt oen 63 ESC 0 nl n2 o 63 ESC lt 32 gt
120. Expanded cccccccccceeeeseeeeeeeeceeeeeeesceeeeeeeeceeeeeaacsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaseeeeeeeee 66 Setting the EXD ANS ION 332 45 0 oie arene vena iare a E coe Ex tenet eset hex Ex beh ce ence pce stb eb ce eget ob 66 Device Timeout with Very Large Characters ssssssss en 67 What is a Character Cell 95 saaecite daa md tete ro AS ARANA A ARAS 68 Oversized Character Dimensions Qe coda id it t 69 Oversized Character Dimensions 270 a a o M DR 70 Vertical Position Relative in Oversized cccccccccecc ccce cec ccce cec rece eere ce ree rere e erer 70 Implementing the Line Feed Function 0 sssssssssssseeeeeeneene nennen 71 Line Spacing and Intercharacter Spacing 270 cccccccccsccsseesseeeseecseeeseecseecseeeeeeeeesteees 72 7265 Programmer s Manual ii Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Table of Figures Figure 2 1 Default Character Set for ANSI Emulation 00 to 7E 5 Figure 2 2 Default Character Set for ANSI Emulation 80 to FF sss 6 Figure 2 3 National Character Substitutions O 18 sssssssssss 17 Figure 2 4 Effects of Character Spacing Parameters ooooooooooococnccccccnncccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnos 22 Figure 2 5 Dor Column Coding oit aetas A e ALD ILS AL ELLA Ia ALPE A PE Pea gis 29 Figure 2 6 Dot Graphics Example riva iv A aod na oat 30 Figure 3 1 arts ota Bar Gode uc do DD en Geo ER Ed EA 35 Figure 3 2 Effects of Rotation P
121. I ae 25 ESCOT ese ak doe oaa iat da f ds 25 ESG 2X Pes ive on Ch Gub tt dace oes 2 25 ESC oce te etra RD ct ERR 27 ESOC neues LORI Xie dg ate 7 dc 7 pol mI 116 DG CEMETERIES NEP 116 ESQ VEL dee ttti Am e e delete dem 59 Summary of Possible Codes A 9 Function set unit sheet feeder Space super subscript mode OFF super subscript mode ON suppress ASCII codes 128 to 159 typestyle selection underline mode ON OFF unidirectional printing for one line unidirectional printing ON OFF variable line spacing n 360 inch vertical tab vertical tab channel selection vertical tab stops vertical tab stops in channels A 10 Summary of Possible Codes Sequence Page ESC Ui ai Se he a e 62 ESG EM no unm te tog whet a aah a trs 108 OP ito ir te aay ce sis sia NA 118 ESCM aa Stet fete Da Panes Betas a 29 ESC S MA RAAT cos Shee Shee eS bea 29 ESG V is ire savin RG see ble GM Ga le d 110 ESC ae intet n EM E ont da oe Ron ae 37 ESC seis ataco LV sam Syste Ace A 39 ESQ A tenu ke dtr A ea E eoe Sos 96 ESG U ens us oie a arte ety Rea Rf CS a e 96 ESCHER ene sme esee drm street dg d 27 MT aio mei eer le LUIS mear rf 94 ds 118 ESCALA dua oe oe Eee EG xus 57 ESC B lt ni gt lt nl6 gt lt 0 gt leen 55 ESC b lt m gt n 09 lens 57 Appendix B Character Sets B 2 Character Sets The following character sets can be selected via control panel or by Escape sequences which correspond to the selected emulation mod
122. If the designed pitch of the current font is 10 cpi and doublewide is set then a character spacing argument of 72 results in a pitch of 5 cpi at which horizontal segments of line draw characters are contiguous Example ESC 90 60 lt sp gt G sets the vertical spacing to 8 lines per inch and the horizontal spacing to 12 characters per inch 720 divided by 8 90 and 720 divided by 12 60 Dec 27 91 52 48 59 54 48 32 71 Hex 1B 5B 39 30 3B 36 30 20 47 p2 CPI 120 6 The quick brown fox Jumped 90 8 The quick brown fox jumped over 72 10 The quick brown fox jumped over the lazy 60 12 The quick brown fox jumped over the lazy dog s back 51 14 The quick brown fox jumped over the lazy dog s back 45 16 The quick brown fox jumped over the lazy dog s back 40 18 The quick brown fox jumped over the lazy dog s back 36 20 The quick brown fox jumped over the lazy dog s back Figure 2 4 Effects of Character Spacing Parameters 7265 Programmer s Manual 19 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 2 ANSI Forms Setup Command Description ESC p1 p2 p3 p4 p5 r FORMS SETUP Sets top of form and sets form length as well as top and bottom margins in decipoints Parameter p1 is form length 720ths p2 is the top margin p3 sets the length of white space between the baseline of the last allowed line and the end of form p4 is the top print reference and p5 is the left print reference Any pa
123. Line Limit SLL o o e 13 Right Justification ON o o e e ee 14 GenteringiON e uu ia eos e ala d edd 14 Right Justification and Centering OFF Ls 14 Character Spacing e e 15 Spacing Increment SPI llle 15 Horizontal Spacing i s a roesai 0 00 a a e E ee 16 Horizontal Character Spacing SHS 0 0 18 Character Spacing SCS aoaaa aa ee ll 19 Additional Character Spacing SACS 20 Reduced Character Spacing SRCS 24 4 21 Horizontal Motion Index HMI o 0220022 ae 22 Horizontal Step Microspace o e 23 Line Spacing ti a rd e es 24 Vertical Spacing SVS o o llle 24 Line Density 6lpi o e 25 Line Density 8lpi o e E a 25 Set Line Spacing SLS 0 o e 26 Character Styling o e e 27 Superscrip ON ll ss 27 S bScripE ON rar a na a a ER eng 27 MICEOSCIIDE ON y metsi reed oe Eos eR ox edd dog e Po ae 27 Super Sub Microscript OFF ee eae 27 Double Height ON Upper Half llle 29 Double Height ON Lower Half llle 29 Double Height OFF asi ded daa is Sd ew Ae Bee 29 Prnt Quality a emu Ronde E Rem Bed 31 Select Typestyle st x ven ca RR Rare atti eec qe die 33
124. Mode OSC ESC p1 p2 SP Selects emulation GENEMU ESC p1 pn Unidirectional Printing GENUPD ESC p1 p2 p3 SP Customer Setup Save Unsave GENCSX ESC pt pnp Assign Source for Forms GENASF ESC pix Selects National character set Select National Characters GENSNC ESC k ESC Q or PU Executes Self Test Print Test Character GENPTC Exceptions N 2 01 d o TO c Barcode ratios are controlled by one parameter that affects both width and height Block characters print at a fixed size Block characters printed with a fixed rotation The Genicom printer saves ESC sequence changes to powerup we load from the powerup menu DEL character prints a space Genicom prints a house character Across 13 6 inches we print one less character per line in the following CPI s 6 6 25 6 67 8 33 8 57 9 12 12 5 13 3 17 14 and 18 If we set Auto CR to ON then form feeds also get a CR where Genicom does not add CR to form feeds Genicom does add CR to FF if Auto CR on Vertical Tab is enabled Different combinations of adding and removing vertical tabs will produce different results compared to the Genicom printer 9 Differences when mixing some form lengths with top and bottom margins 10 Some illegal parameters are treated different than the Genicom printer 11 Default horizontal and vertical tabs are not defined at power up Programmer s Reference EPSON Emulation Table of Contents Description of
125. NNSONNNSNNSNSNNSNUSUX S S S SNS SSSSSS SSSSS amp SSSSS SSSSASS SSSSS amp SSSS amp CVs SN UN VN ONL NS ONSEN SER SS SEUS SSSSSS S S S S A 4 Summary of Possible Codes Function Page setlinefeedto1 BinCh 25 set line feed to 7 72 inch 25 setlinefeedto1 BinCh 25 set line feed to n 216 inch 27 italic mode ON o o o o o ooo oo 42 talio mode OFF ooo ooo 42 print ASCII codes 128t0159 110 suppress ASCII codes 128 to 159 110 paper end sensor deactivation 115 paper end sensor activation 115 line feed n 60 inch orn 72 inch 27 justification and centering 14 reset all vertical tab stops 55 vertical tab StOPS o ooo ooo 55 clear all tab settings 57 vertical tab stops in channels 57 set HMI horizontal motion index 16 form length in inches 5 form length in lines 5 clear all horizontal tab stops 47 horizontal tab stops o o oo 47 emphasized mode ON o o o 38 horizontal and vertical step width 49 deselect sheet feeder 108 sheet feeder magazine 1 108 sheet feeder magazine 2 108 select sheet feeder uaua 108
126. NT 4 Overscore and strike through EIE continous line END Underline Double continous line Serie I UnderH e i Character Styling 41 Italic Mode ON Italic Mode OFF Data Structure ASCII ESC 4 italic mode ON o hex 1B 34 dec 27 52 ASCII ESC 5 italic mode OFF o hex 1B 35 dec 27 53 Description All characters following this code sequence are printed in italics Italic characters are also printed if codes with the eight bit set by ESC are sent to the printer o The characters hex BO to hex DF hex 176 dec 223 and hex FO to hex FE dec 240 dec 254 of the extended EPSON graphics character set cannot be printed in italic mode O Italic print mode set by ESC 4 or ESC Master Select is reset Italic mode can be used in all print qualities DPQ NLQ LQ Example 10 REM italic mode 20 LPRINT CHR 27 4 30 GOSUB 70 40 LPRINT CHR 27 5 50 GOSUB 70 60 END 70 LPRINT Matrix Printer 80 RETURN Matrix Printer Matrix Printer 42 Character Styling Print Mode Selection ESC Data Structure Description ASCII ESC lt n gt hex 1B 21 n dec 27 33 n This code sequence allows simultaneous control of print features like the character size and attributes characters By this code sequence several print features can be simulta neously set via the value of n This command can also be used to reset all character sty ling features or to reset the printer to standard Pica fon
127. O Graphics 65 Example 66 Graphics Graphics and text can be mixed within one line If image data lying outside the printable area are input these data are ignored 10 REM bit image print 20 WIDTH LPT1 255 30 FOR i 0 TO 4 40 LPRINT Mode STR i 50 LPRINT CHR 27 CHR i CHR S 254 CHR S 0 60 FOR j 1 TO 127 70 LPRINT STRINGS 1 64 16 4 1 STRINGS 1 128 32 8 2 80 NEXT j 90 LPRINT CHRS 10 CHRS 13 100 NEXT i 110 END Mode Select Graphics Mode ESC G Data Structure Description ASCII ESC G nj ny m hex 1B 28 47 nj ng lt m gt dec 27 40 71 nj ng lt m gt Valid values nL 1 Ny 0 m 1 49 select graphics mode Enters graphics mode Prepares printer for the sequence ESC see page 76 Following sequences are valid after entering graphics mode ESC c Set page format ESC C Set page length in units ESC V Set absolute vertical print position ESC v Set relative vertical print position ESCA Relative horizontal step ESC Absolute horizontal step ESCr Select printing color ESC U Set reset unidirectional printing ESC Variable line spacing n 360 inch ESC U Set unit ESC EM Sheet feeder ESC Printer initialization ESC Print raster graphics LF Line feed FF Form feed CR Carriage return Graphics 67 The graphics mode can be exited with sequence ESC see page 114 o In this mode text and graphi
128. SCII Char HRI 2 Print Pass 3 Direction 2 On Off Normal Compr Double Single Unidir Bidir O a ak Io ox xx 1x x I x x x x x 1 x x xXx XxXxX I Il x lt x lt X X X X X x x X X OX X xx xoxo x lt xX xX E poo E lt A p o I x po x x OE 1k 1K gx they are reserved for future functions Human Readable Index C two physical print passes or special print modes i e emphasized 10 Barcode Printing It is recommended to avoid using of ASCII Characters 0 and 1 when possible since It depends on the used printer type whether the printer performs Double Pass with Barcode Types HRI 2 5 matrix default 2 5 industrial 2 5 interleaved Code 11 Code BCD matrix Code 39 Codabar EAN 8 with HRI EAN 8 without HRI 2 5 matrix default EAN 13 with HRI EAN 13 without HRI MSI modified Plessey UPC Awith HRI UPC A without HRI UPC E with HRI UPC E without HRI Delta Distance IBM Code 128 EAN 128 F3A01ZO0TOZZPFPACTIOTMOOU gt l All commercial barcodes for labeling systems of the H I K L N O P Q Types can be extended using the barcodes Add On 2 or Add On 5 see section Add On Barcodes HRI Human Readable Index HRI characters are centered if enough space is left If the barcode printout is smaller t
129. Sequence only applies for 24 needle printer mau Sequence only applies for ESC P2 printers Bags On the next page you will find examples for Escape sequences complete with BASIC pro gramming examples Introduction 3 4 Introduction Setting the form length to 72 lines Escape Sequence ESC C n with n 72 Transfer ASCII ESC C H hex 1B 43 48 dec 27 67 72 100 REM Sample for the ESC C lt n gt sequence in ASCII 110 REM using form with 72 lines 120 REM Please note in ASCII Syntax you can use ASCII values 130 REM equal or bigger codetable no 32 only 140 REM LPRINT CHR 27 C H REM mixed syntax 150 REM set form length up to 72 lines 160 REM The same sequence written in hexadecimal syntax 170 LPRINT CHR amp H1B CHRS amp H43 CHRS amp H48 180 REM set form length up to 12 lines 190 REM The same sequence written in decimal syntax 200 LPRINT CHRS 27 CHRS 67 CHRS 72 210 REM set form length up to 72 lines Setting the form length to 12 inches Escape Sequence ESC C NUL _ lt n gt with n 12 Transfer ASCII ESC Ge NUL FF hex 1B 43 00 0C dec 27 67 0 12 100 REM Sample for the ESC C NUL lt n gt sequence in ASCII 110 REM using form with 12 inch length 120 REM Please note in ASCII Syntax you can use ASCIT values 130 REM equal or bigger DO CREE no 32 only 140 REM LPRINT CHR 27 C CHRS 0 CHRS 12 REM
130. T This is the font selected with i 60 NEXT i 70 END This is the font selected with This is the font selected with This is the font selected with This is the font selected with This is the font selected with This is the font selected with This is the font selected with THIS IS THE FONT SELECTED WITH This is the font selected with This is the font selected with DOCU P WN O 36 Character Styling Typestyle Selection ESC q Data Structure Description Beispiel ASCII ESC q lt n gt hex 1B 71 n dec 27 113 n orn 24 orn orn This sequence selects normal typestyle outline typestyle shaded typestyle or shaded out line typestyle All the characters of the extended EPSON character set with the exception of the characters hex BO to hex DF dec 176 dec 233 hex F4 dec 244 and hex F5 dec 245 can be printed in the selected typestyle The following parameter a ssignment applies Typestyle 0 hex 00 or hex 30 1 hex 01 or hex 31 2 hex 02 or hex 32 3 hex 03 or hex 33 Normal typestyle Outline typestyle Shaded typestyle Shaded Outline typestyle 10 REM character style q CHRS 0 PRI lt 0 gt normal characters LF i q CHR 1 20 LFS CHRS 10 30 LPRINT CHRS 27 40 LPRINT 50 LPRINT CHRS 27 60 LPRINT 1 70 LPRINT CHRS 27 80 LPR 90 LPRINT CHRS 27 100 L 110 END 0 normal charact F lt 1 gt outline characters LFS q CHRS
131. TE Tally Genicom 7265 Table of Contents Chapter T INtrod ctON Pr 1 Chapter 2 ANSI aa o ea et OA A AE EA 2 Control Code SUMMA tri dE AA AAA IA 3 Control Code Comparison 7 BIUS Bibl la A eel 4 Obit CONTO LOOSE 4 Escape Sequence Summary cocccccccccconononnnnnnncnononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnss 6 Printer Hands Ma Kime eR 8 Printer COMMON nr ii 9 Graphics Rendition Fonts and Modes oooococccccccoooooooonooonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 15 NATIONAL CHARA CTER E Tiida A AAA ARA 16 FORMS SSG UD anna 20 Superseriplo UDS OP ad 21 Vertical MO Md AE 22 MATIAS tt E 25 Horizontal Movement copii 26 EE EA O es ea A eden er caueee 28 DOES tina ea A a eae 29 Sample Basic Program for Dot Coding c cccccccecseccctecteeceeeeseeeeeeeneeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 30 Graphics Control FUNC IONS oooooccccnnccccconcnnnnnnccnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnn 31 7265 Programmer s Manual i Copyright 2004 TallyGenicom Table of Contents Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes uon roter rota A A A A 33 Before You Begin Set the Form Lenglth lesen ennt 34 Setting Bar Code Paratrmelters nero ehe Deo Oe De Dedi eii edt t tct 35 General Rules for Assigning Parameters eese tenenti 36 Bar Code Command Sequences ias 37 Element V VIdllS aia A tom fet len 39 Other Parametros 40 DG PES ui AR omo
132. The 13 digit represents the check num ber The even figures of the information have a factor of 3 the uneven figures a factor of 1 Counting begins from the left The resulting cross sum is divided by 10 The remai ning figure is subtracted from the modul 10 If the remainder is 0 the check number is also 0 Example Information 4 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 Factor 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 Product 4 0 1 6 4 3 12 5418 7 244 9 0 Cross sum 89 10 modul 9 remainder 1 check number For remainder 0 the check number is also 0 38 Barcode Printing EAN 8 UPCA 7 numbers are transferred for the EAN 8 code The 8 digit represents the check number The even figures of the information have a factor of 3 the uneven figures a factor of 1 Counting begins from the left The resulting cross sum is divided by 10 The remaining fig ure is subtracted from the modul 10 If the remainder is 0 the check number is also 0 Example Information 4 0 1 2 3 4 6 2 Factor 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 Product 12 0 3 2 9 4 18 Cross sum 48 10 modul 8 remainder 2 check number For remainder 0 the check number is also 0 11 numbers are transferred for the UPCA code The 12 digit represents the check num ber The even figures of the information have a factor of 3 the uneven figures a factor of 1 Counting begins from the left The resulting cross sum is divided by 10 The remai ning figure is subtracte
133. US ASCII UK ASCIT GERMAN FRENCH ITALIAN character sets CHRS 27 en B US ASCII CHRS 27 en ar UK ASCII 5 CHRS 27 K 0 GOSUB CHRS 27 R GOSUB CHR 27 Y GOSUB GERMAN FRENCH ITALIAN CHRS 35 CHRS 36 CHRS 64 CHRS 91 CHRS 92 CHRS 93 CHRS 94 CHRS 96 CHRS 123 CHRS 124 CHRS 125 CHRS 126 GOSUB GOSUB HHOLNATLO LIS 8 N1 CI 8HA0U 4a0U8B acS ue 89 g u oe i 130 130 130 130 130 Miscellaneous 85 Activation of Characters Data Structure ASCII SO B ZG single shift SS2 o hex 8E dec 142 ASCII SI B ZG single shift SS3 o hex 8F dec 143 Description O Activation of one single character from G2 single shift 2 O Activation of one single character from G3 single shift 3 The functions SO and SI each activate one single character of the graphic character set into the codes 21 7E The character following the code for the changeover is replaced once o The graphic character set activated by the locking shift function page 81 Activation of Character Sets will not be changed with this function Example 10 open lptl as 1 20 width 1 32000 30 Example Single Shift 40 t1 French a accent is printed 50 t2 funny a is printed 60 print 1 chr 27 R Designate G3 French Substitution 70 Table 80 print 1 chr 143 Si
134. a cyan sequence is ignorered red yellow magenta two pass print is automatically executed RE RK The sequence CSI 0 m resets all CSI m sequences A maximum of 16 CSI m sequences can be joined in one sequence e g CSI n1 n2 nx m 10 RE color selection 20 LPRINT CHRS 27 31m 30 LPRINT this is written with red colour 40 LPRINT CHR 27 34m 50 LPRINT this is written with blue colour 60 END this is this is written with red colour written with blue colour Miscellaneous 73 Input Data Control CSI Z Data Structure ASCII CSI 9g z C set bit 8 1 o hex 9B 39 A dec 155 57 122 ASCII CSI e z C set bit 8 0 2 hex 9B 38 A dec 155 56 122 ASCII CSI 7 2 C bit 8 unchanged hex 9B 37 7A dec 155 55 122 Description By means of this MTPL sequence the eighth data bit is set to 1 This results in accordance with the selected character set characters from the national character set or italic characters to be printed By means of this MTPL sequence the eighth data bit is set to 0 This means that wrong character printing caused by the eighth data bit set high by the system can be avoided CSI 9 z is ignored if Extended Character Set is selected if Graphic Mode is selected Note that following the sequence CSI 8 z all subsequent control sequences must begin with an ESC because CSI 9B cannot be represented by a 7 bit code This remains in
135. acing see page 19 should be used The character size will not be changed Character Spacing 21 Horizontal Motion Index HMI CSI p Data Sructure ASCII CSI n p C set HMI hex 9B n 70 dec 155 n 112 Description n 0 20 The normal character density is enlarged by n 1420 inch If n is set to zero default setting HMI is disabled Example 10 REM horizontal motion index 20 LPRINT this is normal width 30 LPRINT CHR 27 3p 40 LPRINT now 3 120 inch is added to normal width 50 LPRINT CHR 27 6p 60 LPRINT now 6 120 inch is added to normal width 70 END this is normal width now 3 120 inch is added to normal width now 6 120 inch is added to normat width 22 Character Spacing Horizontal Step Microspace CSI q Data Structure Description Example ASCII CSI n q C set horizontal step hex 9B n 71 dec 155 n 113 n 1 255 The space between characters is enlarged by n 1 420 inch at the current print position Examples CSI q enlarging character space by n 1420 inch CSI 10q inserts a 412 inch space 10 REM horizontal step 20 LPRINT in the word hori 30 LPRINT CHR 27 20q 40 LPRINT zontal there is a step of 20 120 inch 50 END in the word hori zontal there is a step of 20 120 inch Character Spacing 23 Line Spacing Vertical Spacing SVS CSI SP L Data Structure ASCII CSI n SP L A set vertical spacing lpi hex 9B n 20 4C dec 155 n
136. agazine two END This text is on a form from magazine one This text is on a form from magazine two 78 Miscellaneous Reset to Initial State RIS Data Structure ASCII ESC c A reset to initial state hex 1B 63 dec 27 99 ASCII CSI e 7 C reset to initial state hex 9B 36 7E dec 155 54 126 Description The printer is initialized which means it has the same status as just after power switch on All parameters set by CSI sequences are cleared The active print position is set on the top position of a page document Example 10 REM initialization 20 LPRINT CHR 27 10s REM set left margin 30 LPRINT CHR 27 7w REM set 17 1 cpi 40 LPRINT CHR 27 ly REM set NLQ 50 LPRINT CHR 27 1z REM set subscript 60 GOSUB 100 70 LPRINT CHR 27 6 80 GOSUB 100 90 END 100 LPRINT Matrix Printer 110 LPRINT LPRINT 120 RETURN Matrix Printer Matrix Printer Miscellaneous 79 Command Set CSI Data Structure ASCII CSI 2 n de B command set hex 9B 3F n 7E dec 155 63 n 126 Description For n the following parameters are available n hex dec command set 1 31 49 MTPL 2 32 50 MTPL IBM Graphics Printer 3 33 51 MTPL IBM Proprinter XL 4 34 52 MTPL IBM Proprinter XL 24e 5 35 53 MTPL EPSON FX 6 36 54 MTPL EPSON LQ 7 37 55 MTPL NEC P60 70 10 31 30 49 48 end of special command interpretations and return to standard command set e g end of Barcode interpretation start of Bar
137. ame line are lost in the print buffer O The right margin is set to n columns depending on the character density selected As Soon as the right margin is reached after this command has been given a carriage re turn and a line feed are added to the characters to be printed O The left margin is set to n columns depending on the character density selected 12 Paper and Text Formatting Example 10 REM left and right margin 20 LPRINT 1 2 3 4 5x 30 LPRINT 12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123 40 LPRINT CHR 27 1 CHR 10 CHRS 27 Q CHR 53 50 LPRINT Now the left margin is set to column 10 and 60 LPRINT the right margin is set to column 53 70 LPRINT CHRS 27 1 CHRS 5 CHRS 27 0 CHRS 41 80 LPRINT Now the left margin has been reduced 90 LPRINT to column 5 and the right margin has 100 LPRINT been set to column 41 110 END 1 2 3 4 5 12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123 Now the left margin is set to column 10 and the right margin is set to column 53 Now the left margin has been reduced to column 5 and the right margin has been set to column 41 Paper and Text Formatting 13 Justification and Centering ESC a Data Structure ASCII ESC a lt n gt hex 1B 61 lt n gt orn dec 27 97 lt n gt orn Description In some cases it is necessary to center headlines or to have the text printed in a way that left or right margin or both margins
138. ape DEL TF Delete If 8 bit control code interpretation is enabled IND 84 Index NEL 85 Next Line HTS 88 Set Horizontal Tab VTS 8A Set Vertical Tab PLD 8B Partial Line Down PLU 8C Partial Line Up RI 8D Reverse Index DCS 90 Device Control String PU1 91 Private Use 1 CSI 9B Control String Introducer ST 9C String Terminator OSC 9D Straps and Options Introducer 7265 Programmer s Manual Some of the control codes are interpreted when encountered within a graphics data sequence Interpretations relative to graphics are shown on page 31 Copyright 2004 TallyGenicom 3 Chapter 2 ANSI ompar ison 7 Bit 8 Bi t 8Bi t Hex Description 7 Bit Hex IND 84 Index ESCD 1B 44 NEL 85 Next Line ESC E 1B 45 HTS 88 Set Horizontal Tab ESC H 1B 48 VTS 8A Set Vertical Tab ESC J 1B 4A PLD 8B Partial Line Down ESC K 1B 4B PLU 8C Partial Line Up ESC L 1B 4C RI 8D Reverse Index ESC M 1B 4D DCS 90 Device Control String ESC P 1B 50 PU1 91 Private Use 1 ESC Q 1B 51 CSI 9B Control String Introducer ESC 1B 5B ST 9C String Terminator ESC 1B 5C OSC 9D Straps and Options Introducer ESC 1B 5D 8 bit Control Codes ANSI assigns control functions to characters 80 hex through 9F hex and calls these characters C1 codes You can set the printer to either interpret 80 hex 9F hex as control codes or not The ISU default status of this option is disab
139. arameters oooooooocccccccccnccnnnononnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnononnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnns 40 Figure 3 8 Comma Space and Asterisk DeliMitefS oooooooonnonicininnnnnnncccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnno 43 Figure 3 4 Horizontal Tab Deltmiler ao ndn dd ni nies 44 Figure 3 5 Horizontal Position Relative DeliMiter ooonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnccnccccccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 45 Figure 3 6 Vertical Bar Code SUMDOJS eeeei eene enne en eene nere enne annona up mas 46 Figure 4 1 Expanded and Oversized oerte riter Uer terrere properas qat 66 Figure 4 2 Character Cells elei itta dixe ix rtg ext stet ex bt nut sunt ee 68 Figure 4 3 Vertical Character DIMEenNSIONS ooooooocccconcncccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnininons 69 Figure 4 4 Sideways Character Dimensions ooooococccccccccccccnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 70 7265 Programmer s Manual iii Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 1 Introduction The TallyGenicom 7265 provides rugged versatile impact printers useful in a variety of applications Flexibility of use is guaranteed by the wide range of software emulations and programming options The current printer characteristics are the result of years of application experience It is a hallmark of TallyGenicom products that they may be used with a broad range of systems hardware emulations and protocols All trademarks and registered trademarks are property of their respective
140. arameters reverts to defaults dependent on the selected emulation p1 selects 0 GENICOM ANSI 1 Tally ANSI 2 21 Reserved 22 Epson FX286e p2 selects 0 1 full reset Example Select Epson emulation with full reset Dec 27 91 50 50 59 49 32 126 Hex 1B 5B 32 32 3B 31 20 7E ESC p1 p SELECT PAPER PATH p1 selects 08 unload current path 10 unload current path and load tractor 2 12 unload current path and load tractor 1 Forms in the current path should be torn off before changing paper paths If you send a command to change paper paths and there is more paper downstream of the print head than 1 2 times the current form length or six inches whichever is greater then the printer returns paper to the position that was current before the command was received and a fault condition is set If you send a command to change paper paths and the target path is the current path then the printer executes a form feed If you load tractor 2 when tractor 2 is not installed the command will be ignored Example Unload tractor 1 and load tractor 2 Dec 27 91 49 48 112 Hex 1B 5B 31 30 70 7265 Programmer s Manual 10 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 2 ANSI Commands Descripton ESC c RESET TO INITIAL STATE Recalls the user format presently assigned to the current paper path Dec 2799 Hex 1B 63 ESC p1 t ENABLE DISABLE OVERSIZED EXPANDED BAR CODE MODES p1 Effect Page 0 reset special modes 1 select
141. are justified By means of this code sequence the prin ter automatically justifies the text Justification mode depends on the value selected for n 0 hex 00 or hex 30 left justification default setting 1 hex 01 or hex 31 centered 2 hex 02 or hex 32 right justification 3 hex 03 or hex 33 left and right justification o o The justification mode must always be set at beginning of the line Justification mode can be used in all print qualities O If left and right justification is activated the validity of codes ESC ESC and HT at the beginning of the line is checked Left and right justification is only achieved if the length of the data line measured from the start of data input up to a CR or LF code fills 7596 to 12596 of the given printed area At less than 75 left and right justification justification is not achieved If the length of the printed line extends more than 25 outside of the printed area left and right justifi cation justification is carried out for the character spacing which comes closest to the value of 100 within the printed area The remaining data are printed in the next line 14 Paper and Text Formatting Example 10 REM justification and centering 20 WIDTH LPT1 255 30 LPRINT CHR 27 Q CHR 48 REM set 40 LPRINT CHR 27 a CHR 1 CENTERED 50 LPRINT HEADLINE 55 LPRINT CHR 27 a CHRS 3 60 LPRIN right margin Now the right and the left justification th blanks
142. before The first print position on the follow ing paper is the first top physically possible position The FF code can also give a carriage return if automatic carriage return is selected refer to Operator s Manual The next print is started in the column following the print end of the last print out if no CR is transmitted After switching on the printer the default form length is set to 12 inches 72 lines per page Europe 12 USA 11 62 Print Positioning Partial Line Down PLD Data Structure ASCII PLD A partial line down hex 8B dec 139 Description If the preceding character is in normal position PLD moves the active position down to a sufficient distance to give the following characters the appearence of being subscripted If the preceding character is in a superscript position PLD moves to normal position Partial Line Up PLU Data Structure ASCII PLU A partial line up hex 8C dec 140 Description If the preceding character is in normal position PLU moves the active position up a sufficient distance to give the following characters the appearence of being superscripted If the preceding character is in a subscript position PLU moves to normal position Print Positioning 63 Reverse Index RI Data Structure ASCII RI B reverse index hex 8D dec 141 Description The code RI moves the active position to the preceding line An CR option is not permitted Next Line NEL Data Structure ASCII NEL B next l
143. ble Codes Sequence CSlOc CSI 0g CSI 0m CSI 0m CSI On CSIO n1 net CSI O SP I CSI O SP K CSIOSPL CSI 0 SP q CSI 0 SP X CSIOw CSI Oy CSI Oz CSI 1 z CSI 1g CSI 1m CSI 1n CSI 1 SP I CSI 1 SPK CSI 1SPL CSI 1 SP q CSI 1 SP X CSI 1 w CSI 1 y CSI 1z CSI 10m CSI 10 y CSI 10 z CSI 111 CSI 11h CSI 11 m CSI 11 w CSI 11 y CSI 12m CSI 12w CSI 12y Function Page request for printer identification a 91 clear horizontal tab stop at current position 46 clear all selected fonts ee eee 33 reset COlOn ezo e cs a ect e eee ee 72 device status report Ready no malfunction 92 cut sheet paper vic a e A A a A 76 size unitDecipoints 2 2 0 ren 8 horizontal character spacing 10 cpi 0 18 verticalspacing6lpi 0 e a 24 load default menu 0 less 69 high printquality o e 31 horizontal spacing 5cpi llle 16 draft print quality DPQ 2 020020 eee 31 superscript OIN ss iad dn E SC a Be a Ra es UC WU 27 automatic gap adjustmentON 00200022 ee 70 clear all vertical tab stops 0 0 000000 000 52 bold or increased intensity o 72 device status report Busy no malfunction 92 size unit Millimeters o llle 8 horizontal character spacing 6 cpi o 18 v
144. c 27 43 n When the printer receives this code sequence it sets the line feed pitch to 180 inches 24 needle version or to 7216 inches 9 needle version The value specified for n must be in the range of O to 255 O This code sequence sets the line feed pitch to so inch 24 needle version or to Ma in ches 9 needle version The value specified for n must be in the range of 1 to 127 This code sequence sets the line feed pitch to Y360 inch 24 needle version The 9 needle printer ignores this sequence The value specified for n must be in the range of 1 to 127 Once line spacing has been set with one of these sequences an appropriate line feed is made whenever code LF is received until line spacing is changed with one of the code sequences ESC 0 ESC 1 ESC 2 ESC 3n ESC n or ESC An Line Spacing 27 Example 10 REM variable line spacing 20 FOR N 20 TO 40 STEP 10 30 LPRINT CHRS 27 3 CHRS N 40 LPRINT these two lines are printed with 50 LPRINT a spacing of N 180 inches 60 NEXT 70 END these two a spacing these two a spacing these two a spacing lines are printed with of 20 180 inches lines are printed with of 30 180 inches lines are printed with of 40 180 inches 10 REM variable line spacing 20 FOR N 20 TO 40 STEP 10 30 LPRINT CHRS S 27 3 CHRS N 40 LPRINT these two lines are printed with 50 LPRINT a spacing of N 216 inches 60 NEXT 70 END these two a s
145. c 11 Hex 0B FF FORM FEED Causes printing to move to the top left margin on the following form Dec 12 Hex OC CR CARRIAGE RETURN Causes printing to move to the left margin on the current line This permits overprinting the current line Dec 13 Hex OD IND INDEX If 8 bit control code processing is enabled then a line feed is performed at the graphics vertical pitch The horizontal position stays the same Dec 132 Hex 84 RI REVERSE INDEX If 8 bit control code processing is enabled then a reverse line feed is performed at the graphics vertical pitch The horizontal position stays the same Dec 141 Hex 8D ESC P ENTER DOT GRAPHICS MODE Also sets line spacing to 1 12 inch so that LF produces contiguous graphics lines Dec 27 80 Hex 1B 50 ESC EXIT DOT GRAPHICS MODE Also restores line spacing to its previously set value Dec 27 92 Hex 1B 5C 7265 Programmer s Manual 31 Copyright 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 2 ANSI Commands Description ESC p1 q GRAPHICS DENSITY Sets the graphics density The printer powers up with a graphics density of 72 x 72 dpi changes are not stored in NVRAM p1 horizontal density vertical density 0 72 dpi 72 dpi 1 144 dpi 72 dpi Dec 27 91 48 113 Hex 1B 5B 30 71 7265 Programmer s Manual 32 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 2 ANSI Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes This chapter describes the characteristics and lists ANSI contr
146. cally printer menu setting Parameter group Auto Tear Independent of the menu settings the paper is set to view position last printed line This sequence has no affect if the respective position is just set manual by means of the Tear key or automatically printer menu setting Parameter group Auto Tear D This sequence is only available if an optional cutter is installed and cuts fanfold paper at the next perforation Q This sequence is only available if an optional cutter is installed it cuts above the current line if the text to be printed was ended with a CR hex OD dec 13 it cuts below the line if the text to be printed was ended with a LF hex OA dec 10 The sheet feeder if installed and connected has to be selected via the menu of the printer refer to the Operators Manual If a cutting device is installed a If no cutting device is installed Miscellaneous 77 For compatibility to former printers a sequence like CSI 21 x n will also be accepted In this case the parameter x will be ignored Paper is inserted on receipt of Example 10 CR hex 0D dec 13 if CR LF is selected LF hex 0A dec 10 VT hex 0B dec 11 print data REM sheet feeder LPRINT CHR 27 3t REM set form length LPRINT CHR 27 21 LPRINT This text is on a form LPRINT from magazine one LPRINT CHR 12 REM form feed LPRINT CHRS 27 22 LPRINT This text is on a form LPRINT from m
147. cally shifts among subsets based on the data that you send Subset A All standard alphanumeric keyboard characters control characters and special characters Subset B All standard alphanumeric keyboard characters lower case alpha characters and special characters Subset C Set of 100 digit pairs from 00 to 99 Start Stop characters Yes Center character code None NULL character Yes Intercharacter gap None Characters per symbol Variable Check digit Automatically generated by the printer Cannot be disabled Delimiters Horizontal tab When no tabs are defined a space is inserted hp_relative 10 Automatic data compression and subset selection 11 CPI at default element widths 11 07 12 Combined start stop character length 0 583 CO J OI A coc 7265 Programmer s Manual 54 Copyright 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes MSI Style19 1 Bars per character 4 dark bars and 4 light bars 2 Character set O through 9 3 Start characters 1 dark bar and 1 light bar Stop characters 2 dark bars and 1 light bar 4 Center character code None 5 NULL character Yes 6 Intercharacter gap None 7 8 Characters per symbol Variable Check digit The check digit can be supplied by the data source 9 Delimiters Space comma horizontal tab hp_ relative 10 HR characters Currently selected font special HR font special OCR A OCR B fo
148. character generator select font by pitch and point select graphics mode select ROM character generator set absolute vertical print position set HMI horizontal motion index set line feed to 1 6 inch set line feed to 1 8 inch set line feed to 7 72 inch set line feed to n 216 inch set page format set page length in units set printer offline set printer online set relative vertical print position Sequence Page ESCASA Ve S See EX uk 101 ESG O oo at e ns ah ots amp Re die rta 115 ESOO 1 o6 snnt eod Ua ed dd le Lii rus A iR d 115 ESG Neen 2 z Ge don d rt ode de ah ah bis 10 ESCI S user hod wld MR ues hs nk AE s s 110 ESQ iced s pue LEG Pe E nd Ee 95 ESCI ed corse e et ehe occ tr eT e 43 ESC atasca das Pyne Ash ae 76 ESC xiii A A b 34 A eyed eis xe qe ee OH 114 ESC ENS nexu a Bch vue don RAD Aa 113 ESG pn 2d 4 da nto dto e and d 23 ESC s em ui A o ae oa 107 ESG Ven na isa RIETI 53 ESG B 054 ir tete eed inr alan 55 DOZ te aces e t Rut o No rtis B ak ete MEE re ds d 20 DA ctor ioeitium Ed rd tat us ss 116 ESG Olen 2a ct et te Rive Satis SA iem cs 10 ESCO Sida Sec ei eesti dn dy rhe Var ae ee 12 ESC S nane man dune tS qd Le fs 40 ESC m nf n2 a 71 ESC9 amp SNULNUL lisse 79 ESO Xa t wt ee E 32 ESQ G sud we Le Boa 2 Dae e M a 67 ESC 61x NUle 2 8 3 cs eek eS 79 ESQ Vo us tme eos eco Bates REA 59 ESGOT rra a Ris Ware eo ie aad ES 16 ESG erect E Sent alee or cen pus AS
149. character spacing 6 cpi llle 18 vertical spacing 12 lpi o o e 24 load menuNo B e 69 A 4 Summary of Possible Codes Sequence CSI 3 w CSI 3z CSI 30 m CSI 31 m CSI 31 n1 n2 CSI 32 m CSI 33m CSI 34 m CSI 35 m CSI 36 m CSI 37 m CSI 39 m CSI4g CSI 4 m CSI4SP I CSI4SPL CSI 4 SP q CSI4w CSI 4 y CSI 4z CSI 5n CSI5n1 n2 CSI5SP CSI5 w CSI5 y CSI 5z CSI 50m CSI 50 n1 ne CSI 51 n1 n2 CSI 52 n1 n2 CSI 53 m CSI 55 m CSI6 CSI6SP CSI 6 w CSI 6z CSI 7 SP I Function Page horizontal spacing 8 6 cpi 2 0 o e 16 line density B pl o e ee 25 colo rblack boo ctra e rh RE eem acer nl Na 72 color Ted zou rd mde na rd das ut 72 output paper to stacker 1 sorter 0 76 COMO PEN A a dte 72 color yellow oi ci ee A a ee 72 GOIO DIVES tro ml A A es med pt GA aye 72 color magenta red e 72 colorcyan blue o leer 72 color white 5 a a a AAA a aa A e 72 default color black 0 o e 4 72 clear all vertical tab stops llle 52 underline mode N o 2s 39 Size unit MiS 0 2 ede Rad qe M O 8 verticalspacing 8 lpi 2 222r 24 loadmenuNo 4 0200000 eee g o ee a a 69 horizontal spacing 10 cpi 2 2 lens 16 NN ions dita eee Oe the BAG ee ESL 31 line density 8 Ip ii oo aa Ge ee AA 25 re
150. cipoints may be discernible when switching from one emulation to another the printer is quite predictable when switching from another emulation to ANSI and then back again The 7265 is a decipoint machine Locations and dimensions such as tabs margins absolute and relative positions and form lengths are described in ANSI control sequences in units of 1 720 inch If you have the choice of describing your page in one or another of the supported emulations consider that ANSI gives you more flexible control of locations of objects on the page In this chapter we include spaces between characters in escape sequences for clarity ESC H for instance is easier to read than is ESCH Where the space character forms a component of a control sequence then it is designated by lt SP gt Listed below are the control codes interpreted by this printer along with page numbers where you can find detailed descriptions 7265 Programmer s Manual 2 Copyright 2004 TallyGenicom Control Code Summary Code Hex Description ETX 03 ETX ACK Communication Protocol ACK 06 ETX ACK Communication Protocol BEL 07 Sound Beeper BS 08 Backspace HT 09 Horizontal Tab LF OA Line Feed VT OB Vertical Tab FF 0C Form Feed CR OD Carriage Return SO OE Barcode Oversized On Sl OF Barcode Oversized Off DC1 XON 11 Printer Ready DC3 XOFF 13 Printer Busy ESC 1B Esc
151. code interpretation wo wo AR o AR o Tally Printer Language For more information see the Barcode Programmer s Manual 80 Miscellaneous Activation of Character Sets Data Structure ASCII SI ZG locking shift LSO 0 hex OF dec 15 ASCII SO ZG locking shift LS1 o hex OE dec 14 ASCII ESC n ZG locking shift LS2 LS3 LS1R LS2R LS3R e hex 1B n dec 27 n Description O Activation of GO for codes 21 7E O Activation of G1 for codes 21 7E For n the following parameters are available n hex dec locking shift LS n 6E 110 B LS2 Activation of G2 for codes 21 7E O 6F 111 B LS3 Activation of G3 for codes 21 7E 7C 124 B LSSR Activation of G3 for codes A1 FE 7D 125 B LS2R Activation of G2 for codes A1 FE 7E 126 A LS1R Activation of G1 for codes A1 FE These sequences activate various character sets also see Invocation of Character Set GO G3 page 83 4 registers from GO until G3 are supported Into each of these registers a graphic character set by a designation sequence can be placed Miscellaneous 81 o A set of up to 94 characters is made ready for use Example 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 82 Miscellaneous open lpt1 as 1 width t1s t2 print print print print print print end 1 32000 French Characters German Characters 1 chr 27 R 1 chr 27 o 1 0a t1
152. cs cannot be mixed on the same page This sequence does not allow text and user defined character printing Vertical and horizontal tab settings are cleared 68 Graphics Graphics Mode Reassignment ESC Data Structure ASCII ESC lt s gt n reassign graphics mode hex 1B 3F lt s gt lt n gt dec 27 63 s n Description This code sequence redefines one of the four alternate bit image codes ESC K ESC L ESC Y or ESC Z as one of the bit density numbers used with the ESC lt m gt code sequence Available values are s 75 76 89 90 ASCII K L Y Z n 0 single density n 1 double density n 2 double density high speed n 3 quadruple density n 4 screen graphics n 5 plot graphics 1 1 O n 6 screen graphics II n 7 plot graphics double density n 32 single density en n 33 double density 24 n 38 screen graphics II en n 39 triple density en n 40 sixfold density en For example if you send the following code before you run a graphics program it will change every instance of mode K single density to mode 3 quadruple density LPRINT CHR 27 K CHR 3 Graphics 69 Example 70 Graphics REM Reassigns graphics sequence 20 LPRINT CHRS 27 K CHRS 60 CHRS 0 30 REM Standard ESC K graphics sequence 40 FOR X 1 TO 60 REM 60 Columns 50 LPRINT CHR 255 REM one byte per columns 60 NEXT X LPRINT 70 LPRINT CHRS 27 K CHRS 3 80 REM Reassigns ESC K to quadr
153. cter goes 8 positions to the right CSI a next character goes one position to the right Positions beyond the right margin are ignored Print Positioning 55 Horizontal Position Backward HPB CSI j Data Structure ASCII CSI n j A set horizontal position backward hex 9B n 6A dec 155 n 106 Description n 1 default setting This sequence moves the print head to the left The unit depends on PUM Positioning Unit Mode and is either character positions or defined by the SSU function Select Size Unit see page 8 Example CSI 8j next character goes 8 positions to the left CSI j next character goes one position to the left Positions outside the left margin are ignored 56 Print Positioning Vertical Position Absolute VPA CSI d Data Structure Description ASCII CSI n d A set vertical position absolute hex 9B n 64 dec 155 n 100 n 1 default setting current top margin This sequence moves the print head to a vertical print position absolute The unit depends on PUM Positioning Unit Mode and is either lines or defined by the SSU function Select Size Unit see page 8 Example CSI 40 d move the active print position to line or vertical position 40 CSI d move the active print position to top margin Positions outside the bottom margin are ignored Print Positioning 57 Vertical Position Relative VPR CSI e Data Structure ASCII CSI n e A set vertical position relat
154. cture Description qp ASCII CSI n SP g A set character spacing hex 9B n 20 67 dec 155 n 32 103 n specifies the character spacing The unit is either decipoints or depends on the SSU selection Select Size Unit see page 8 The character size will not be changed Character Spacing 19 Additional Character Spacing SACS CSI SP Data Structure ASCII CSI n SP Vv A set additional character spacing hex 9B n 20 5C dec 155 n 32 92 Description n specifies the additional character spacing The units are either decipoints or defined by SSU Select Size Unit see page 8 This function enlarges the inter character spacing The function will typically be used with proportional spacing to get effects like spaced out or right justification With fixed spacing functions like SCS Set Character Spacing see previous page 19 should be used E The character size will not be changed 20 Character Spacing Reduced Character Spacing SRCS CSI SP f Data Structure Description o ASCII CSI n SP f B set reduced character spacing hex 9B n 20 66 dec 155 n 32 102 n specifies the reduced character spacing The units are either decipoints or defined by SSU Select Size Unit see page 8 This function reduces the inter character spacing The function will typically be used with proportional spacing to get special effects like e g kerning With fixed spacing functions like SCS Set Character p
155. d On barcode Example 1 EAN13 barcode with HRI and Add On 2 extention Format DC4 nnnnnnn nnnnnn cnn DC4 10 REM code EAN 13 with add on 2 extention 20 LPRINT CHR 27 11 30 LPRINT CHR 26 K3 111 CHR 25 26 40 LPRINT CHR 20 0123456 789012 012 CHR 20 50 LPRINT CHR 27 10 PA Y ol desse Wrsgorz ll 36 Barcode Printing Example 2 EAN13 barcode with HRI and Add On 5 extention Format 10 REM code 20 30 LPRINT CHRS 123 456 LPRINT CHR LPRINT CHR LL So se A y DC4 nnnnnnn nnnnnn cnnnnn DCA EAN 13 with add on 5 extention LPRINT CHRS 27 K3 111 CHRS 25 0123456 789012 012345 CHR 20 12345 LLLI Barcode Printing 37 Check The following barcode types must be given a check number for transfer to the printer Number TypeHand EAN8 Calculation TypeKandL EAN 13 m TypeNandO UPC A m Type P and Q UPC E The check number c is transferred after the barcode information n For the EAN type this is printed as the last figure in the HRI data line For the UPC type the check num ber is not printed in the HRI data line The commercial barcodes can be extended with the following user specific additional bar codes see also section Add On Barcodes m Add On 2 barcode m Add On 5 barcode Here the check number c is transferred before the barcode information n EAN 13 12 numbers are transferred for the EAN 13 code
156. d characters from ROM to RAM using ESC if necessary m Define the new character in the RAM using ESC 4 m Select the RAM character set using ESC 74 Download Character Generator Copy ROM into RAM ESC Data Structure Description Example ASCII ESC NUL n NUL copy ROM CG hex 1B 3A 00 lt n gt 00 dec 27 58 0 n 0 This Escape sequence copies the specified character set see ESC k n from ROM or from the font module to RAM There the individual characters can be altered by the user EM Copy ROM CG into Download CG RI 20 LPRINT CHRS 27 CHRS 0 CHRS 0 CHRS 0 30 REM Select Download CG 40 LPRINT CHRS 27 CHRS 1 CHRS 0 50 LPRINT NA De wp DU e 60 END Download Character Generator 75 Print Raster Graphics ESC Data Structure ASCII ESC c v lt h gt m nj ng lt d1 gt lt dx gt hex 1B 2E c v lt h gt m nj ng d4 dy dec 27 46 c v lt h gt m nj ng lt dy gt lt dx gt Description Valid values c 0 c 1 v 10 20 h 10 20 m 1 8 24 O lt n lt 255 O lt ny lt 127 O lt d lt 255 This sequence supports following print densities m 1 8 or 24 1 80r24 1 80r24 ESC allows printing dot graphics in raster format A compression algorithm is provided for multiple printing of a particular byte of data 76 Download Character Generator Description of parameters
157. d from the modul 10 If the remainder is 0 the check number is also 0 Example Information 4 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 Factor 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 Product 12 0 3 2 94 4 415 6 214 8 27 Cross sum 107 10 modul 7 remainder 3 check number For remainder 0 the check number is also 0 Barcode Printing 39 UPCE Add On 5 For the UPCE barcode type 7 numbers are transmitted The 8 digit is the check number The uneven figures of the information have a factor of 3 the even figures a factor of 1 Counting begins from the left The resulting cross sum is divided by 10 The remaining in teger value is subtracted from the modul 10 The result is transmitted as the check num ber c Example Information 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 5 Factor 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 Product 0 1 6 93 12 5 18 Cross sum 45 10 modul 5 remainder 5 check number For remainder 0 the check number is also 0 6 numbers are transmitted check number c 5 information items n The uneven figu res of the information have a factor of 3 the even figures a factor of 1 Counting be gins from the right The resulting cross sum is divided by 10 The remaining integer value is subtracted from the modul 10 The result is transmitted as the check number c Example Information 3 8 6 1 0 4 Factor 3 9 3 9 3 Product 24 54 3 0 12 Cross sum 93 3 remainder 3 check number The check number is not printed in the clear
158. data line HRI 40 Barcode Printing Add On 2 3 numbers are transmitted check number c and 2 informations n The check number results from the remaining integer value of modul 4 Example 1 Information 0 0 4 Remainder 0 Lo Example 2 Information 2 0 6 Remainder 2 PRE Example 3 Information 3 9 9 Remainder 3 L 3 Example 4 Information 1 0 9 Remainder 1 1 The check number always lies between 0 and 3 it is not printed in the HRI line Barcode Printing 41 US Postnet Barcode US Postnet Barcode ESC 1SPp Data Structure ASCII ESC P 1 SP p hex 1B 5B 31 20 70 dec 27 91 49 32 112 Description After receiving this sequence numeric characters from 0 hex 30 to 9 hex 39 are inter preted as barcode figures Other Alpha characters are ignored Control characters from hex 00 dec 9 to hex 1F dec 31 terminates this barcode mode You may use this sequence in every emulation The printer can print barcode in NLQ and LQ If draft print quality DPQ is selected the printout is performed in NLQ O The character e g CR carriage return hex 0D which terminates barcode mode will neither be printed nor carried out A tab command hex 09 dec 9 is carried out in this barcode 10 REM US postnet barcode 20 LPRINT CHR 27 11 30 LPRINT CHR 27 1 p 1234567 CHRS 13 40 LPRINT CHRS 27 210 42 US Postnet Barcode Large Character Printing LCP LCP Header
159. densities 10 REM emphasized mode 20 LPRINT CHRS 27 z this is printed in the normal mode 30 LPRINT CHR 27 z and this inthe emphasized one 40 END this is printed in the normal mode and this in the emphasized one Character Styling 35 Italic Mode ON CSI 3m Italic Mode OFF CSI 23 m Data Structure ASCII CSI 3 m A italic mode ON hex 9B 33 6D dec 155 51 109 ASCII CSI 2 3 m A italic mode OFF hex 9B 32 33 6D dec 155 50 51 109 QD The sequence CSI 0 m resets all CSI m sequences A maximum of 16 CSI m sequences can be joined in one sequence e g as follows CSI n1 no nx m Example 10 REM italic mode 20 LPRINT CHRS 27 3m 30 GOSUB 70 40 LPRINT CHR 27 23m 50 GOSUB 70 60 END 70 LPRINT Matrix Printer 80 RETURN Matrix Printer Matrix Printer 36 Character Styling Proportional Mode ON SGR CSI 26 m CSI 2 y Proportional Mode OFF CSI 50 m CSI 7 y Data Structure ASCII CSI 2 6e m A proportional mode ON hex 9B 32 36 6D dec 155 50 54 109 ASCII csi 2 y C proportional mode ON hex 9B 32 79 dec 155 50 121 ASCII CSI 5 o m A proportional mode OFF hex 9B 35 30 6D dec 155 53 48 109 ASCII CSI 7 y C proportional mode OFF hex 9B 37 79 dec 155 55 121 Description When in default font type all characters are assigned a fixed equally wide space When in proportional mode the spaces between each character are set to the actual width of the charact
160. e The following example shows you how to find the hexadecimal value for a character from the character set table ASCII B dec 66 hex 42 J Standard Character Set Character Sets B 3 International Substitution Table normal font US ASCII French German UK Danish Swedish Q w Oni Italian Spanish I Japanese Norwegian Danish II Q ww m BZ Zr Spanish II SE SE SE SE HE HE E SE om RE OSE cA WU UW WM Mi Wl uv MW n uv A Wi WW HW Zr L American B 4 Character Sets International Substitution Table italic font US ASCII D Er French German UK Danish Swedish TD i Mm Ry 8 O o Italian Spanish I DD GS Bh Japanese EN Norwegian Danish II SIS Wm OD a n 0 S M En An pa Spanish II HF E E E HE O E aE AE hh e oe AHA NM Ali Nl DIL Ni Ni ux ni n Mu af L American Character Sets B 5 Graphics Character Set
161. e Gothic DP cancel bold cancel underline cancel doublewide expanded cancel proportional select black ribbon color select red ribbon color select green ribbon color select yellow ribbon color select blue ribbon color select magenta ribbon color select cyan ribbon color 7265 Programmer s Manual Copyright 2004 TallyGenicom 15 Chapter 2 ANSI NATIONAL CHARACTER SET Command Description ESC p x SELECT NATIONAL CHARACTER SET Character Set USA Germany French A Italian United Kingdom Spanish Danish Norwegian A Swedish Finnish D 2 OMAN ON OTD Oo If a parameter value p is not recognized then the default character set 0 USA is selected To use substitutions that have characters in the 80 hex to 95 hex range first disable 8 bit control code processing either by escape sequence or from the Emulation Options Menu Next enable character set 2 either by the Straps and Options control sequence on page 14 or from the Emulation Options menu This causes ASCII codes 80 hex 9F hex to be mapped to printable characters instead of control codes Example To select the United Kingdom character set Dec 27 91 55 120 Hex 1B 5B 37 78 7265 Programmer s Manual 16 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 2 ANSI D N Danish Norwegian S F Swedish Finnish Code D 35 36 38 42 64
162. e determined as follows If the vendor number first five digits ends in 000 100 or 200 then the product number second five digits must be between 00000 and 00999 The six digits encoded are the first two characters of the vendor number followed by the last three characters of the product number followed by the third character of the vendor number 1st 2nd 8th 9th 10th 3rd 1 If the vendor number ends in 300 400 500 600 700 800 or 900 then the product number must be between 00000 and 00099 The six digits encoded are the first three characters of the vendor number followed by the last two characters of the product number followed by a 3 1st 2nd 3rd 9th 10th 3 If the vendor number ends in 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 or 90 then the product number must be between 00000 and 00009 The six digits encoded are the first four characters of the vendor number followed by the last character of the product number followed by a 4 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 10th 4 If the vendor number does not end in zero then the product number must be between 00005 and 00009 The six digits encoded are all five digits of the vendor number followed by the last character of the product number 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 10th Bars per character 2 dark bars and 2 light bars Character set O through 9 Start Stop characters 2 dark bars and 1 light bar Center character code None NULL character Yes
163. e following chapter All of our numbers ignore the quiet zones you need to allow 1 2 inch per symbol for the horizontal rotations Defining characters per inch for fixed length codes is straightforward in that the start stop and center characters always take up the same portion of length of the symbol The styles that have center characters are all fixed length For variable length codes net characters per inch depends on the number of data characters in the symbol The overhead imposed by start stop characters is the same whether a symbol represents 1 data character or 10 so the net cpi is greater for longer symbols We show the overhead imposed by start stop characters separately for the variable length codes The default element widths are the narrowest that we recommend If you use wider element widths and maintain a 3 1 ratio of wide elements to narrow elements then you can extrapolate characters per inch for wider symbols If you depart from the 3 1 ratio then it s simpler for you to print test symbols and derive formulae based on what you measure than it is for us to tell you how to do the computation for each style One way to determine the combined length of start stop characters for a variable length symbol is to print two symbols one with twice as many data characters as the other Measure the shorter symbol and call this L1 measure the longer symbol and call this L2 The combined length of the start stop characters is dz 2xL1 L
164. e smaller of the two values This sets the proportion of the large to small the same for spaces as it is for bars 7265 Programmer s Manual 39 Copyright 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes Other Parameters p9 Rotation Sets the absolute rotation in 90 degree increments If parameter p12 0 then the human readable font is shown in the following table p9 Rotation HR Font if p12 2 0 0 no rotation default current font 1 no rotation special bar code HR font 2 270 rotation special bar code HR font 3 no rotation special bar code HR font 4 270 rotation special bar code HR font Rotation 0 Rotation 1 I m O 2 B Ez E o c O de Es O uoneiou Figure 3 2 Effects of Rotation Parameters 7265 Programmer s Manual 40 Copyright 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes p10 Horizontal Resolution A value of 0 is 60 dots per inch while a value of 1 is 1 120 dots per inch The default depends on the style in force EAN and UPC styles default to 1 All other styles default to 0 Note This parameter affects bar codes printed at 0 or 180 rotation only If you select the higher resolution then bar codes are darker and are printed at a somewhat slower speed p11 Check Character Enable N A p12 Human Readable Font N A p13 Height in 1 24 inch Increments Normally bar code height is specified in 1 12 inch increments by p2 Only specify p13 if y
165. e switches the printer to continuous enlarged print mode when 1 is specified for n and resets printing to normal mode when 0 is specified Enlarged print activated by the code sequence SO or ESC SO is also reset to normal mode when n 0 Valid values for n are hex 00 hex 01 hex 30 and hex 31 18 Character Spacing Example 10 REM enlarged character densities 20 LPRINT CHRS 27 P REM 10 cpi 30 LPRINT normal 10 cpi character density 40 LPRINT CHRS 27 W CHR 1 REM continuous enlarged density 50 LPRINT 10 cpi continuous enlarged 60 LPRINT CHR 27 M REM 12 cpi 70 LPRINT 12 cpi continuous enlarged 80 LPRINT CHR 27 W0 REM normal character density 90 LPRINT CHR 14 REM enlarged character density for one line 100 LPRINT this is enlarged only 110 LPRINT for one line 120 END normal 10 cpi character density 10 cpi continuous enlarged 12 cpi continuous enlarged this is enlarged only for one line Character Spacing 19 Condensed Character Density SI ESC SI Reset Condensed Character Density DC2 Data Structure ASCII SI or ESC SI condensed print ON o hex OF or 1B OF dec 15 or 27 15 ASCII DC2 reset condensed print o hex 12 dec 18 Description When the printer receives this code the data will be printed approx 40 smaller than in normal mode Condensed print mode can be used in all print qualities It can be used during printing in the double strike or bold
166. ed 160 LPRINT CHR 27 1 set oversized 170 LPRINT ABCj 180 LPRINT CHR 27 0t cancel mode fe O s Expanded f Td HB J Figure 4 1 Expanded and Oversized Expanded mode is based on the current font is limited to 8x the parent font size and propagates up from the baseline Reverse paper motion occurs for vertical expansions The horizontal resolution reflects the current font selection If you send a line feed character while in expanded mode then the paper advances by the current vertical expansion factor times the current line feed increment Oversized is based on a unique font is rotatable expandable to 1870x and propagates down from the top of the character cell The resolution is always 120 dpih x 144 dpiv If you send a line feed character while in oversized then paper advances five dot rows for 0 rotation or nine dot rows for 270 rotation The scaling algorithms for the oversized function are obviously better Setting the Expansion The size of the parent oversized font is 10 points 12 cpi You can set the horizontal and vertical dimensions of oversized characters separately in increments of 100 of the parent font size Limits are 100 to 18 700 The larger number corresponds to an uppercase M about 18 7 inches high The control sequence that sets the expansion is the ANSI Graphic Size Modification 7265 Programmer s Manual 66 Copyright 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 4 ANSI Oversized ESC pv
167. ed the top margin is set to the first line the bottom margin is set to the last line 2 form length If there are any logical problems for example the setting of top margin is larger then the page length the sequence is ignored If only one margin is changed the other margin is automatically reset to the default value The unit depends on PUM and is either character positions or defined by the SSU func tion Select Size Unit see page 8 Paper and Text Formatting 9 Example 10 REM top and bottom margin 20 LPRINT CHR 27 6t REM form length 30 LPRINT CHR 27 2 5r REM set margins 40 FOR F 1 TO 2 50 FOR L 2 TO 5 60 LPRINT form F line L 70 NEXT L NEXT F 80 LPRINT 90 LPRINT RP nen te Or REM clear margins 100 FOR F 1 TO 110 FOR L 1 TO k 120 LPRINT form F line L 130 NEXT L NEXT F 140 END form 1 Line 2 form 1 Line 3 form 1 Line 4 form 1 Line 5 form 2 Line 2 form 2 Line 3 form 2 Line 4 form 2 Line 5S form 1 line 1 form 1 Line 2 form 1 Line 3 form 1 Line 4 form 1 Line 5 form 1 Line 6 form 2 Line 1 form 2 Line 2 form 2 line 3 form 2 Line 4 form 2 Line 5 form 2 Line 6 10 Paper and Text Formatting Set Left and Right Margin Clear Left and Right Margin Data Structure ASCII CSI m ona s A set left and right margin hex 9B m 3B n2 73 dec 155 m 59 n2 115 ASCII CSI s A clear left and right margin hex 9B 73 dec 155 115 Description n4 specifies the value of the left margin
168. ee code levels are defined as follows A This code level is to be used for creating new printer driver versions B This is an optional extension of the MTPL standard C This function is to be used to ensure compatibility tp previous products When creating new printer driver versions this code level should not be used anymore Introduction 3 4 Introduction Character explanation and symbol description BOS Lower case Informations Sequence only applies for 9 needle printer Sequence only applies for 24 needle printer In the following you will find an example for a MTPL sequence with a Basic programming example Set to a form length of 72 lines MTPL Sequence n with n 72 Transmission 72 37 32 55 50 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 REM Sample for the CSI n t sequence in ASCII REM using formulars with 72 lines REM Please note in ASCII Syntax you can use ASCII values REM equal or bigger codetable no 32 only LPRINT CHR 155 72 t REM mixed syntax REM set form length up to 72 lines REM The same sequence written in hexadecimal syntax LPRINT CHRS amp H9B CHR amp H37 CHR amp H32 CHRS amp H74 REM set form length up to 12 lines REM The same sequence written in decimal syntax LPRINT CHR 155 CHR 55 CHR 50 CHR 116 REM set form length up to 72 lines Paper and Text Formatting Form Length CSI t
169. effect until the printer receives either the sequence ESC 9 zor ESC 7z 74 Miscellaneous Example 10 REM input data control 20 LPRINT CHR 27 7z 30 GOSUB 90 40 LPRINT CHR 27 9z 50 GOSUB 90 60 LPRINT CHR 27 8z 70 GOSUB 90 80 END 90 FOR I 97 TO 103 LPRINT CHRS I NEXT I 100 FOR I 161 TO 167 LPRINT CHR I NEXT I 110 LPRINT LPRINT 120 RETURN abcdefg i Nag BPreocuti AN20 abcdefg amp Miscellaneous 75 Sheet Feeder Paperway Eject Form Data Structure ASCII CSI n mo no Y A set sheed feeder hex 9B n 3B m 3B m 7B dec 155 n 59 m 59 n2 123 ASCII CSI 2 J C eject form o hex 9B 32 4A dec 155 50 74 Description With the sequence CSI n ny no for n the following parameters are available n hex dec sheet feeder 0 30 48 cut sheet paper manual o 5 35 53 fanfold paper tractor 1 e 6 36 54 fanfold paper tractor 2 4 21 32 31 5049 bin 1 front e 22 3232 5050 bin2 rear e 23 3233 5051 bin3 reserved 6 31 3331 5149 stacker 1 of the sorter O 50 35 30 53 48 move paper to normal print position e return of view or tear off position 51 35 31 53 49 move paper to tear off position 52 35 32 53 50 move paper to view position 10 51 35 31 5349 cuts fanfold paper at the next perforation 54 35 34 5352 cutis made above below the current line n4 C specifies the horizontal print head position during the paper loading process is ignored with new printer models
170. eives this code it prints all the data in the print buffer then advances the paper one line The LF code can also give a carriage return if automatic carriage return is selected If no CR is given the next printing starts in the column following the end of printing The amount by which the paper is advanced depends on the current line spacing The default line spacing of the printer is 1 inch Print Positioning 49 Vertical Tab Stop VT Data Structure ASCII VT vertical tab stop hex 0B dec 11 Description When the printer receives this code it prints all the data in the print buffer then advances the paper to the next vertical tab stop position The VT code can also give a carriage return if automatic carriage return is selected refer to Operator s Manual If no CR is given the next printing starts in the column following the end of printing The amount by which the paper is advanced depends on the current line spacing After switching on the printer no vertical tab stops are set default configuration If there are no vertical tab stops between the current print position and the end of the page or if there are no vertical tab stops set VT assumes the same function as LF 50 Print Positioning Set Vertical Tab Stop at Current Position VTS Data Structure Description Vertical Index Data Structure Description ASCII VTS A set vertical tab stop hex 8A dec 138 This code sets an horizontal tab stop at the
171. en horizontal tabulation is carried out e g at a position being ten spaces to the right of the current print position code HT will shift printing in normal mode one inch to the right Except for enlarged mode the print position at which the character spacing is changed is defined as the first column provided that character spacing is changed within a line If there are no tab stops following the current print position code HT is ignored If the next tab stop exceeds the right margin the printer carries out a carriage return and line feed on receipt of this code When the printer receives this code it prints all the data in the print buffer and then advances the paper by one line The amount by which the paper is advanced depends on the current line spacing Null Selection of condensed print mode Code for double width print within one line enlarged printing Control Codes 117 SOH hex 01 dec 01 SP hex 20 dec 32 VT hex 0B dec 11 118 Control Codes Start Of Heading Space When the printer receives this code it prints the data in the print buffer and then advances the paper to the next vertical tab stop position The next character is printed in the column following the last print position if no CR is transmitted The amount by which the paper is advanced varies depending on line spacing When the printer is switched on no vertical tab stops are set If there are no vertical tab stops between the cur
172. er 170 LPRINT 180 LPRINT CHR 27 3t 190 LPRINT 001234 001234 200 LPRINT CHR 27 0t 210 LPRINT space delimiter 220 LPRINT 230 LPRINT CHR 27 4 240 LPRINT CHR 27 3t 250 LPRINT 1234 1234 260 LPRINT CHR 27 0t 270 LPRINT height 3 4 hr on interleaved 2 of 5 turn on bar code comma delimiter turn off bar code turn on bar code space delimiter turn off bar code style 4 3 of 9 turn on bar code asterisk delimiter turn off bar code 280 LPRINT asterisk delimiters are used in pairs 7265 Programmer s Manual Copyright 2004 TallyGenicom 42 Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes JE TE Interleaved 2 of 5 comma delimiter JE YE Interleaved 2 of 5 space delimiter US D3 1234 1234 Asterisk delimiters are used in pairs 3 of 9 Figure 3 3 Comma Space and Asterisk Delimiters 7265 Programmer s Manual 43 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes Horizontal Tab Delimiter The HT control code 09 is a valid delimiter in all bar code styles The leading quiet zone of a subsequent symbol begins at the first tab stop right of the trailing quiet zone of the current symbol This is evident in the sample where the quiet zone of the second symbol begins at the third tab stop Since this printer stores tabs in nonvolatile RAM while power is off and since the control sequence that sets horizontal tabs does not clear existing tabs you
173. er the copyright symbol a small c in a 8 e e e circle instead of the character e e o cs lee o w 500 e S elee0 o s 0 e 2 eee 1 The evaluation of the bytes in each column is as follows 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 128 i28 O i28 i28 64 6 6 2 9 0 22 0 22 22 16 9 16 i6 O i6 8 0 8 3 3 3 4 8 2 2 2 2 1 Totals 56 68 146 40 130 40 130 68 56 0 0 82 Download Character Generator Example 10 REM Download Character Definition 20 LPRINT CHR 27 x CHR 0 REM select draft print quality 30 LPRINT CHRS 27 amp CHRS 0 CHRS 139 40 LPRINT CHRS 56 CHRS 68 CHRS 146 CHRS 40 50 LPRINT CHR 130 CHR 40 CHRS 130 CHRS 68 60 LPRINT CHRS 56 CHRS 0 CHRS 0 70 LPRINT CHRS 27 CHRS 1 CHR 0 80 LPRINT ee e e e e e e a e 90 END 0000000000000000000 IRR AAA AAA RAR RAR AAA Attribute A 9 needle printer Attribute A consists of descender data and proportional data The descender data deter mines whether or not the ninth needle will be used and the proportional data determines the starting and ending positions of the character in the print area COLUMNS Descenders 9 needle printer 1234567 8 9 101112 Some characters like g or y extend below the line To define a character that extends below the line the ninth needle which corresponds to row 0 7 of the matrix field mu
174. er Spacing ESC SP Data Structure ASCII ESC SP lt n gt hex 1B 20 lt n gt dec 27 32 n Description The size of the spaces between the characters is increased by n 1480 inch in NLQ and LQ and in Draft by n 1 120 inch This space is added to the spaces used for character de finition The value specified for n must be in the range of 0 to 127 Example 10 REM character spacing 20 LPRINT CHRS 27 25 LPRINT CHR 27 x1 REM High Print quality 30 LPRINT this is normal width 40 LPRINT CHRS 27 CHRS 3 50 LPRINT now 3 180 inch is added to normal width 60 LPRINT CHRS 27 CHR S 6 70 LPRINT now 6 180 inch is added 80 END this is normal width now 3 180 inch is added to normal width now 6 180 inch is added 24 Character Spacing Line Spacing Fixed Line Spacing 1 8 Inch Fixed Line Spacing 7 72 Inch Fixed Line Spacing 1 6 Inch Data Structure ASCII ESC 0 set line spacing to 1 8 inch 11 hex 1B 30 dec 27 48 ASCII ESC 1 set line spacing to 7 72 inch E o hex 1B 31 dec 27 50 ASCII ESC 2 set line spacing to 1 6 inch e hex 1B 32 dec 27 50 Description O This code sequence sets line spacing to inch Once the line spacing has been changed by this sequence 1 inch line feeds are made until line spacing is changed by code sequences ESC 1 ESC 2 ESC 3 n ESC Anor ESC n O This code sequence sets line spacing to 772 inch Once the line spacing has been changed by this sequence
175. ers on account of these proportional spaces reading of the text becomes more easy Various font types basically are printed in proportional mode e g Script Kaufmann etc QD The sequence CSI 0 m resets all CSI m sequences A maximum of 16 CSI m sequences can be joined in one sequence e g as follows CSI n1 no nx m Character Styling 37 Example 10 20 30 40 50 60 REM LPRINT LPRINT LPRINT LPRINT END proportional spacing CHR 27 2y this is an example with proportional spacing CHR 27 7y this is an example with normal spacing this is an example with proportional spacing this is an example with normal spacing 38 Character Styling Underline Mode ON SGR Underline Double Mode Underline Mode OFF Data Structure ASCII CSI 4 m A underline mode ON o hex 9B 34 6D dec 155 52 109 ASCII CSI 2 4 m A underline double mode hex 9B 32 31 6D dec 155 50 49 109 ASCII CSI 2 4 m A underline mode OFF hex 9B 32 34 6D dec 155 50 52 109 Description All printed characters including spaces are automatically unerlined Spaces between tab codes HT are underlined 5 The sequence CSI 0 m resets all CSI m sequences A maximum of 16 CSI m sequences can be joined in one sequence e g as follows CSI n1 no nx m Example 10 REM underline mode 20 LPRINT the most 30 LPRINT CHR 27 4m 40 LPRINT important 50 LPRINT CHR 27 24m 60 LPRINT word must be
176. ertical Spacing 4 lpi 2 0 oo a e 24 load menu No 1 lll 69 medium print quality ee 31 horizontal spacing E Cpi lees 16 near letter quality NLQ o o eee 31 subscerpE ON ou SRP a Gee eats a a patas aa X REA 27 fono DPO o a ut OR A ae dr RU E Ba 33 right justification and centering OFF 0004 14 mikroscriptON 2 2222s ss 27 turn OFF positioning unit mode lll 7 turn ON positioning unit mode 22200 7 TOME ate Sipe er bt Ak oer ope ed GU E a then AE Let a 33 horizontalspacing 20 cpi a ra ara y a R KR e RE aO aa a k a 16 fast draft print quality ala ineat aae w a e ap a E e rens 31 TONE 2 A a Ny eae diet tia 33 horizontal spacing 10 cpi oaoa a 16 letter print quality LQ aoa ee 31 Summary of Possible Codes A 3 Sequence CSI 12z CSI 18m CSI 18y CSI 13z CSI 14 m CSI 15 m CSI 16 m CSI 17 m CSI 18 m CSI 19 m CSI 2g CSI 2 J CSI 2m CSI 2 SP I CSI2 SPK CSI2SPL CSI 2 SPq CSI2 SP X CSI2w CSI 2y CSI 2z CSI 2z CSI 21 m CSI 21 n1 ne CSI 22m CSI 22 n1 n2 CSI 23m CSI 23 n1 n2 CSI 24 m CSI 26 m CSI 3g CSI 3m CSI 3n CSI 3 SP CSI S3 SP K CSI3 SPL CSI3SPq Function Page double height ON upper half o o 0 29 TM a ATA quie ah ye ca A 33 high resolution print quality e 31 double height ON lower half 0 o
177. est the current printer status This sequence can only be used if the printer is connected to the computer with a serial interface or a other bi directional interface The printer sends the complete sequence back to host with parameters 0 1 or 3 92 Miscellaneous Enquiry for Status Data Structure ASCII ENQ ENQ enquiry for status hex 05 dec 5 Description With this code it is possible to get a status byte from the printer Status byte Bit 0 1 BUSY Bit 1 1 offline Bit 2 0 paper end Bit 3 1 always 1 Bit 4 1 cover open Bit 5 1 buffer overflow Bit 6 1 parity or framing error Bit 7 0 always 0 CD This code concerns only serial data transfer with ENQ STX protocol Miscellaneous 93 Fill Character Data Structure ASCII NUL fill character without further meaning hex 80 dec 128 Start of Text Block Data Structure ASCII STX start of text block hex 02 dec 2 Description Start of a text block With this code any error message parity error memory overflow is cleared Qp This code concerns only serial data transfer with ENQ STX protocol 94 Miscellaneous STX End of Text Block ETX Data Structure Description p ASCII ETX end of text block hex 03 dec 3 End of a text block This code concerns only serial data transfer with ACK NAK protocol For a detailed description see the documentation which comes with your printer Data Structure Positive Acknowledge ACK ASCII ACK positive ackno
178. etween receipt of this command and a countermanding mode selection command either ESC Ps or ESC Ps t will be printed in expanded mode If you do not want this to happen then you must follow this command immediately with a mode selection command The range of valid parameters in the sense that a valid parameter does not abort the escape sequence is 0 lt Pn lt 32767 The printer rounds off dimension parameters as follows If Pn lt 100 then Pn 100 If 100 lt Pn lt 18700 then Pn is rounded down to the nearest 100 If Pn gt 18700 then Pn 18700 Example to set 20 point type at 1 1 aspect ratio Dec 27 91 50 48 48 59 50 48 48 32 66 Hex 1B 5B 32 30 30 3B 32 30 30 20 42 ESC EXIT OVERSIZED 0 Dec 27 91 48 125 Hex 1B 5B 31 7C ESC SET OVERSIZED p1 p1 1 4 Dec 27 91 49 52 124 Hex 1B 5B 31 34 7C 7265 Programmer s Manual 65 Copyright 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 4 ANSI Oversized Oversized Versus Expanded There are two ANSI functions that print characters scaled according to the Graphics Size Modification parameters Both expanded and oversized are standard features with this printer You can get into expanded mode accidentally when you send the Graphic Size Modification sequence 100 LPRINT CHR 27 720e Vp relative 110 LPRINT Expanded 120 LPRINT CHR 27 400 400 B graphic size mod 130 LPRINT ABCj drops into expanded 140 LPRINT CHR 27 Ot cancel mode 150 LPRINT Oversiz
179. feed is ensured to the end of the barcode and LCP height In unsecured mode the paper feed necessary for barcode and LCP printing is automatic and it is not possible to print more than one line with normal characters in the barcode and LCP line All characters in the mixed line are printed so that the bottom edges are aligned in a straight line 6 Secured Unsecured Mode Example 1 Example 2 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 REM LCP unsecured mode LPRINT CHR S 27 11 REM select unsecured mode LPRINT CHR 27 PSCO CHRS 27 REM set character size to 5 LPRINT CHR 16 5 CHRS 25 LPRINT Example for LPRINT CHR 15 LCP CHR 15 Example for L C unsecured mode NA US unsecured mode 10 RE CP secured mode 20 LPRINT CHR 27 11 30 REM select secured mod 40 LPRINT CHR 27 PSC1 CHRS 27 50 REM set character size to 5 60 LPRINT CHR 16 5 CHRS 25 70 LPRINT This is CHR 15 LCP CHRS 15 80 LPRINT an ex 90 LPRINT ample of an 100 LPRINT expres sion 110 LPRINT in the secured mode This is an ex ample of an expres sion in the secured mode Secured Unsecured Mode 7 Barcode Printing Barcode Before the data which contains the barcode information are transmitted to the printer Header the barcode header must be sent Otherwise the standard parameter values are used see section Header F
180. for the symbol Cat 7265 Programmer s Manual 60 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes Checksum calculation for the asi Cat Data lt CTRL gt lt CTRL gt CU K K Weights 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 For C sum the products of the C WEIGHTS DATA VALUES 1 29 2 46 3 10 4 46 5 12 2 395 2 Divide 395 by 47 395 47 8 remainder 19 Therefore the value of C is 19 which corresponds to character J 3 For K sum the products of the K WEIGHTS DATA VALUES starting with the newly calculated C digit 1 19 2 29 3 46 4 10 5 46 6 12 557 4 Divide 557 by 47 611 47 11 remainder 40 5 The value of K therefore is 40 corresponding to character Send to the printer 7265 Programmer s Manual 61 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes Code 93 Full ASCII Table Code Code Code Code ascil 93 Ascii 98 ASCI 93 ASCI 93 ANA E 134r mm NUL U SP spce e v w SOM SA JA A Aa 6A SX B B B B b B EX sc c C C c 0 ET sD D D d D ENG E E e E AECA ee ee BEE 1 11 6 eG Gr 5G 1 g eG AE 3E ox ee Se ee eee ee ee PE SES ee EE nr ik aa Sie see eee a sk Pps fps ft kK PK Pk 1K en Eco e qo ees cR sm J M J m m M ESN
181. from the character set table ASCII B dec 66 hex 42 Sa LCP Character Set german Character Sets A 3 LCP Character Set US ASCII A 4 Character Sets OCR A Character Set Code Page 437 Character Sets A 5 OCR B Character Set Code Page 437 A 6 Character Sets
182. g Data 9 Needle Printer Calculation of the Attribute 9 Needle Printer Definition of NLQ Characters 9 Needle Printer 24 Needle Printer llle Miscellaneous Print Data as Characters Printing Direction unidirectional for one line Half Speed Printing len Single n 180 inch or n 216 inch line feed Single n 216 inch back feed Colour Selection e xd a A EO eh A International Character Sets 0 0 00022 eae Character Seis ia ha Se Rond RIS Ede eU Assign Character Table 0 00002 eee Input Data Control q e dinean aa a e ee Sheet Feeder sued he E V bh seed S S ES Print Code Area Expansion e 000 Activate Deactivate Graphics Characters Activate Deactivate Direct Print Mode International Code Table eee Printer Initialization 2 002200022005 Activate Paper End Sensor 0 o sn Control Codes 73 73 75 76 79 80 80 81 83 83 84 84 88 92 95 95 96 97 98 98 99 101 103 105 107 108 110 112 112 113 114 115 116 Appendix A Summary of Possible Codes Sorted by Sequences ce eee eee A 2 Sorted by Functions eee eee A 7 Appendix B Character Sets Standard Character Set 0 o
183. g this emulation mode will automatically select the Epson character set Read the Operator s Manual to see whether it is also possible to use ANSI MTPL sequences in addition to the special Epson sequences The following explanations will help you understand the sequences better Every sequence description begins with a header in which the function and the short form of the sequence are listed without parameters e g Setting the form length in lines ESC C Setting the form length in inches ESC C NUL The ESC control code hex 1B dec 27 introduces every Escape sequence The charac ters following the ESC control code here C determine the sequence s function 2 Introduction This is followed by the Data Structure in ASCII hexadecimal and decimal syntax with the necessary parameters e g ASCII ESC C n Setting the form length in lines hex 1B 43 lt n gt dec 27 67 lt n gt For the parameter here n it is necessary to differentiate between two types of syntax a ifthe parameter is in pointed parentheses the decimal value is transferred a ifthe parameter is not in pointed parentheses the ASCII value is transferred Example Parameter syntax lt n gt with n 0 to be transmitted ASCII NUL hex 00 dec 0 Parameter syntax n with n 0 to be transmitted ASCII 0 hex 30 dec 48 Character explanation and symbol description Lower case I Information Sequence only applies for 9 needle printer
184. h 3 byte which must be transferred to the printer 128 10 11 12 e e e e e Data byte 1 25 0 00 00 0 Data byte 2 Data byte 3 ES m o 255 0 1 2 4 8 0 e o e e 128 192 128 0 0 0 0 0 See next page for the corresponding programming example 90 Download Character Generator X CHRS 1 amp OHRSE 0 gop ty HR 12 CHRS 0 Example 100 LPRINJ 110 LPRINJ Qs 130 FOR I 140 READ 150 LPRIN 160 NEXT TZO0 LPEREINT Min Ses ne age eee 180 LPRINT CHRS 27 190 LPRINT 3 3 3 200 LPRINT CHRS 27 CHRS 0 210 EPRENT sx 220 END 230 DATA 0 8 0 0 4 0 0 2 0 0 1 0 240 DATA 0 0 128 255 255 192 0 0 128 0 1 0 250 DATA 0 2 0 0 4 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 ee vew vew Es e E PE Download Character Generator 91 e 24 needle printer Data Structure ASCII ESC 2 NUL x y do lt dy gt do n nsa data first character do d4 do ny ng data second character hex 1B 26 dec 27 38 Description X first character to be redefined y last character to be redefined do leading space of the character d4 number of columns of the defineded character do following space of the character Ny Ng three data bytes for one column in DPQ and LQ two data bytes for superscript or subscript characters
185. h x 72 dpiv The printer powers up in low density The density remains as last set until it is changed or until power is turned off Each byte of graphics data defines one column of dots that is six dots high You can think of the least significant six bits in the byte as controlling the topmost six wires of the print head with the first bit controlling the top wire and the sixth bit controlling the sixth wire down If you wanted to fire all six wires then you would send a byte with a decimal value of 63 Byte values of 0 through 31 decimal are interpreted as control codes so you have to add 64 to any graphics data byte less than 32 decimal You would expect to be able to simply add the value 64 decimal to every graphics data byte in other words just set the seventh bit This is risky because some variations within the 3000 product family interpret decimal 127 the Delete character within a graphics sequence The effect is to delete everything following the last line terminator The safest course is byte_val lt 32 then byte_val byte_val 64 65 66 68 72 88 40 88 72 68 66 65 Figure 2 5 Dot Column Coding 7265 Programmer s Manual 29 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 2 ANSI Sample Basic Program for Dot Coding 10 WIDTH LPT1 255 20 LPRINT CHRS 27 P start graphics 30 FOR N 1 TO 5 40 FOR K 1 TO 10 50 LPRINT CHRS 65 CHRS 66 CHR 68 CHR 72 60 LPRINT CHR 88 CHR 40 CHR
186. han the HRI character field smaller character density CPI is used Start and stop codes are not printed as HRI a space character SP will be stored Barcode Printing 11 Barcode Width By specifying an ASCII value from 0 to 3 the barcode width can be defined This allows ideal adaption to the scanner specifications particularly for long range scanners Table 1 Normal Compressed Header Para older printer older printer meter C 24 types O 24 types e g MT230 e g MT230 x 0 0 53mm 0 54 mm 0 48mm 0 32 mm 0 33 mm _ 0 27 mm 2 Width of 1 074mm 0 67 mm 0 69 mm 0 53 mm 0 43 mm 0 37 mm 9 the x22 1 16 mm 1 09 mm 1 16 mm 0 74 mm 0 65 mm 0 59 mm 3 narrow bar 3 138mm 1 30 mm 1 33 mm 0 95 mm 0 88 mm 0 90 mm 9 Width of y 20 0 53mm 0 54 mm 0 48mm 0 32 mm 0 33 mm 0 27 mm 3 the y 1 0 74mm 0 67 mm 0 69 mm 0 53 mm 0 43 mm 0 37 mm 3 narrow y 2 1 16 mm 1 09 mm 1 16 mm 0 74 mm 0 65 mm 0 59 mm 9 space y 3 1 38mm 1 30 mm 1 33 mm 0 95 mm 0 88 mm 0 90 mm 3 z 0 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 Enlarge 7 _ y 25 1 25 13 a 72 3 0 1 3 0 12 factor 7_3 35 1 35 12 EAN UPC Barcode X Y unregarded Table 2 Header Parameter Normal Compressed Enlargement z 0 1 95 1 1 30 1 factor zzl1 1 60 1 0 95 1 1 These values are true if Compressed Print is selected in the menu see print feature F 2 Note It is
187. he current position Paper and Text Formatting 9 Perforation Skip Reset Perforation Skip Data Structure ASCII ESC N lt n gt set space before perforation perforation skip o hex 1B 4E lt n gt dec 27 78 lt n gt ASCII ESC O reset perforation skip o hex 1B 4F dec 27 79 Description O This code sequence enables the perforation skip function and sets the bottom margin distance between the last print line of one page and the first print line of the following page to n lines The value specified for n must be in the range of 1 to 127 and must be smaller than the form length minus the top margin The printer automatically advances the paper to the first printable line of the next page whenever the current print line falls within the margin area defined as n lines from the bottom of the current page n being the value specified for the bottom margin area The margin area before and after the perforation is n times the current line spacing Once this margin area has been defined it will not be affected by changing the line spacing and remains effective until the printer receives code sequence ESC O reset perforation skip or until form length is changed by ESC C or ESC C 0 O This code sequence deselects the perforation skip function set by ESC N n The bot tom margin is set to O lines thus disabling perforation skip This results in continuous printout unless the software used in the computer defines the form length by c
188. he following parameters are available n hex dec function 0 30 48 clear horizontal tab stop at current position 2 32 50 clear all horizontal tab stops in current line 3 33 5l clear all horizontal tab stops in all lines Examples CSI g clear horizontal tab stop at current position CSI 3 4g clear all horizontal and vertical tab stops for this also see page 52 Vertical Tab Stops ON OFF dd Later changes of character density will not influence the physical position of the tab stops A horizontal tabulation is executed by the HT control code hex 09 dec 9 for this see page 45 Horizontal Tab Stop Print Positioning 47 Example 1 10 REM horizontal tabs 20 LPRINT CHR 27 4w REM 10 cpi 30 LPRINT CHR 27 10 20 30u 40 LPRINT 123456789012345678901234567890123456789 50 GOSUB 110 60 LPRINT CHR 27 0w REM 5 cpi 70 GOSUB 110 80 LPRINT CHR 27 11w REM 20 cpi 90 GOSUB 110 100 END 110 LPRINT CHR 9 tabl 120 LPRINT CHR 9 tab2 130 LPRINT CHR 9 tab3 140 RETURN 123456789012345678901234567890123456789 tab1 tab2 tab3 tab 1 tabe2 tab3 tab1 tab2 tab3 Example 2 10 FOR I 1 TO 3 20 LPRINT 1234567890 CHRS 27 H 30 NEXT I 40 LPRINT 50 FOR J 1 TO 3 60 LPRINT CHRS 9 tab 70 NEXT J 80 LPRINT 90 END 123456789012345678901234567890 tab tab tab 48 Print Positioning Line Feed Data Structure Description LF ASCII LF A line feed hex OA dec 10 When the printer rec
189. he four additional characters Start Stop characters Yes A B C D A B C D T N E Center character code None NULL character Yes Intercharacter gap None Characters per symbol Variable Check digit If needed it must be generated by the data source Delimiters Space comma horizontal tab hp relative 0 HR characters Currently selected font special HR font special OCR A OCR B font 120 DPI only 11 CPI at default element widths 5 05 12 Combined start stop character length 0 458 0 CO J O oF A N UPC A Style 13 Bars per character 2 dark bars and 2 light bars Character set 0 through 9 Start Stop characters 2 dark bars and 1 light bar Center character code Yes NULL character Yes Intercharacter gap None Characters per symbol 12 Check digit The check digit can be supplied by the data source 9 Delimiters Space comma horizontal tab hp_relative 10 HR characters Currently selected font special HR 11 CPI at default element widths 7 64 CO J O OTI A O N gt 7265 Programmer s Manual 52 Copyright 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes UPC E Style 14 Ten digits must be entered as input The first five represent a vendor number and the last five represent a product number Only 6 of the 10 input digits are encoded in the bar code symbol The six characters to be encoded in the symbol ar
190. he print position enters the perforation area Perforation skip operati on is not performed The value specified for n must be in the range of O to 255 This code sequence does not affect the amount by which the paper is advanced by subsequent LF or VT codes 98 Miscellaneous Colour Selection ESC r Data Structure Description ASCII ESC I en hex 1B 72 n dec 27 114 n According to the value specified for n one of the subsequent colours is selected e black magenta cyan blue yellow red green ouaRWN Oo 24 aOuaRWN O black red blue violet yellow orange green The available colours depend on the ribbon used The ribbon used must be matched in the user menu PRINTER OPTIONS RIBBON OPTIONS If a ribbon with several black tracks is used then it is automatically switched every 60 lines between the black tracks The relationship between the track and the ribbon colour for various ribbon cassettes is shown in the following table track magenta cyan red green blue 3 black red ribbon yellow black ribbon black ribbon 1 black black black 2 cyan blue black 3 magenta red black 4 yellow green red Miscellaneous 99 The relationship between colour selection sequences and the resulting colours for several ribbon cassettes is shown in the following table selected colour magenta cyan red green blue 3 black red ribbon
191. he unit is either decipoints or depends on the SSU selection Select Size Unit see page 8 Note also the sequence SPI Spacing Increment see page 15 26 Line Spacing Character Styling Subscript ON Data Structure Superscript ON CSI 0z CSI 1z Microscript ON CSI 10z Super Sub Microscript OFF CSI 2z ASCII CSI n z A character styling hex 9B n 7A dec 155 n 122 Description qp For n the following parameters are availble n hex dec character styling 0 30 48 superscript ON o 1 31 49 subscript ON 0 2 32 50 super sub microscrip OFF 10 3130 49 48 microscript ON o Q These sequences switch the printer to superscript subscript or microscript mode The subsequent characters are printed with about 12 of their normal height If superscript or subscript characters are underlined the underline character is printed at its normal position O This sequence resets the printer to normal mode The base line for microprint is the same as for normal print The sequence CSI 2 z also resets double height For this see also the following page 29 Double Height OFF Character Styling 27 Example 10 REM 20 LPRINT 30 LPRINT 40 LPRINT 50 LPRINT 60 LPRINT 70 LPRINT 80 LPRINT 90 LPRINT 100 LPRINT 110 LPRINT 120 END super sub microscript E M C CHRS 27 0z n2 CHR 27 2z is Einsteins most famous formula TENS CHRS 27 1z 2 CHR 27 2z O is simply water Micro
192. height 1 6 inch n 1 Narrow bar x 0 Narrow space y 0 Ratio of wide to narrow 2 to 1 z 0 When only parts of the header are to be changed copy the header up to the parameter which must be changed and then close the header with the end of header character If a header error was detected the total previous features are still active The Barcode brackets hex 14 dec 20 initiate and terminate the printing of the bar codes If the printer is switched OFFLINE all defined barcodes are printed out completely Plea se not that the barcode remains resident in the background and can be activated again by the barcode bracket Text justification and centering are both permitted With activated barcodes these function are not carried out since they lead to conflicts with the barcodes Following control codes in Barcode strings can be substituted by the appropriate MTPL sequences see also section Special Feature on page 5 Control Code ANSI Sequence CSI Hex 9B or ESC SUB CSI 26 Space s EM CSI 25 Space s DC4 CSI 20 Space s DLE CSI 16 Space s SI CSI 15 Space s MTPL sequences with not matching parameters will be ignored This sequences may only be used with activated BARCODE Barcode Printing 9 Barcode Print Feature F for Selection of F Code HRI or normal compressed as well as single or double pass is switched via character F according to the following table A
193. hex 14 Startcode nnnnnn Separation code nnnnnc Stop code 14 dec 20 Startcode nnnnnn Separation code nnnnnc Stop code 20 Example 10 REM code UPC A with HRI 20 LPRINT CHR 27 11 30 LPRINT CHR 26 N3 111 CHR 25 40 LPRINT CHRS 20 012345 678901 CHRS 20 50 LPRINT CHRS 27 10 0 12345 67890 li 26 Barcode Printing Code UPC A without HRI Type O Syntax Data Structure Example Figures n Check Start code Separation Stop code Number c code ASCII o to g Calculation n m Walt see section hex 30 to 39 Check Number 3A 3A 3A dec 48 to 57 Calculation 58 58 58 ASCII DC4 Start code nnnnnn Separation code nnnnnc Stop code DC4 hex 14 Startcode nnnnnn Separation code nnnnnc Stop code 14 dec 20 Startcode nnnnnn Separation code nnnnnc Stop code 20 10 REM code UPC A without HRI 20 LPRINT CHR 27 11 30 LPRINT CHR 26 O3 111 CHR 25 40 LPRINT CHRS 20 012345 678901 CHRS 20 50 LPRINT CHR 27 10 AAA AN Barcode Printing 27 Code UPC E with HRI Type P Syntax Figures n Check Number c Start code Stop code ASCII p to g Calculation Win 1 1 hex 30 to 39 See section 3A 3A Check Numb dec 48 to 57 Galculsllon 58 58 Data Structure ASCII DC4 Startcode nnnnnnnc Stopcode DC4 hex 14 Start code nnnnnnnc Stopcode 14 dec 20 Start code nnnnnnnc Stop code 20 Example 10 REM
194. hting sequence where the weights from right to left starting with the check character C are in the sequence 1 2 3 14 15 1 2 3 14 15 7265 Programmer s Manual 58 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes The following example illustrates the calculation of the check digits for the symbol CODE 93 Data C O D E sp 9 3 C K Data Values 12 24 13 14 38 9 3 C Weights 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 K Weights 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 For C sum the products of the C WEIGHTS DATA VALUES 1 3 2 9 3 38 4 14 5 13 6 24 7 12 484 2 Divide 484 by 47 484 47 10 remainder 14 3 Therefore the value of C is 14 which corresponds to character E 4 For K sum the products of the K WEIGHTS DATA VALUES starting with the newly calculated C digit 1 14 2 3 3 9 4 38 5 14 6 13 7 24 8 12 611 5 Divide 611 by 47 611 47 13 remainder 0 6 The value of K therefore is 0 corresponding to character 0 Send to the printer CODE 93E0 The Code 93 character table is the same as the Code 3 of 9 character table except that there are four additional control characters at the end Code 93 Character Table 0 0 12 C 24 O 36 minus sign icq AS Ipso ea O SR period 2 152 JI El lok EE space 3 129 0E AS EL AR o ea BF AA Sepe e OA E ao Sa MAA A peg SE Seem A
195. i horizontal spacing 20 cpi horizontal spacing 5 cpi horizontal spacing 6 cpi horizontal spacing 7 5 cpi horizontal spacing 8 6 cpi horizontal step horizontal and vertical position absolute italic mode OFF italic mode ON left and right margin letter print quality LQ line density 6 Ipi line density 8 Ipi line home line limit line spacing load default menu load menu No 1 load menu No 2 load menu No 3 load menu No 4 low print quality LS1R Activation of G1 for codes A1 FE LS2 Activation of G2 for codes 21 7E LS2 Activation of G3 for codes 21 7E LS2R Activation of G2 for codes A1 FE LS3R Activation of G3 for codes A1 FE medium print quality mikroscript ON move paper to normal print position move paper to tear off position move paper to view position MTPL EPSON FX command set MTPL EPSON LQ command set MTPL IBM Graphics Printer command set MTPL IBM Proprinter XL 24e command set Sequence Page CSTN Nan a BEX a Od an BO ah oy a 16 GSU AAW sita do rtc ub ae oy ty s 16 S OW T os he ae an hae Gne Gs a Gi PESCE 16 GSI AUN S Cerat ae desc aueh xd ma e ud 16 ec MEC C 16 CS SW A uL ARS M Fs A doe s 16 OSM barr id aa 23 A O 60 GSS MG i a o he iS A vira 36 CSI QUT ausus ee He eae Wed an lees on 36 GSI ENS Vue A STAT DR ave atta 11 GOFIA ar a a Grut Pero ER etin 31 ESILIZ au wp dex rd a a d 25 CSIUEZ m uli venture uda b uos m Load enira 25 CS n SPA A ss ds a da BA 13 CS SP T
196. ics the actual print position is the most right dot 1 dot of the image Counter a and counter b can be mixed within the same sequence The dot count should be a multiple of 8 Otherwise the remaining data 8 will be discarded 78 Download Character Generator Activate User Defined Character Set ESC Data Structure Example ASCII ESC SOH activate user defined character set in RAM hex 1B 25 01 dec 27 37 1 ASCII ESC NUL activate normal character set in ROM or Font Card hex 1B 25 00 dec 27 37 0 Example 30 LPRINT V 40 REM Copy ROM CG into Download CG 50 LPRINT CHR 27 CHR 0 CHR 0 CHR 0 60 REM Select Download CG 70 LPRINT CHRS 27 CHRS 1 80 LPRINT 90 END UN 1 2 3 B N13 t 1 i Download Character Generator 79 Download Characters ESC The sequence for the definition of download characters receives different parameters for 9 needle and 24 needle printers Use the data structure available for your printer O Definition of Draft Characters 9 Needle Printer Data Structure ASCII ESC amp NUL x y lt A gt n4 no lt N3 gt lt N11 gt define hex 1B 26 00 download dec 27 38 0 is characters Description X first character to be redefined y last character to be redefined A an attribute which consists of descending data and proportional data see Computing the Attribute n4 needle information for column 1 no needle info
197. ies DPQ NLQ LQ Example for calculating n and no Movement of 4 inches towards the right side n 4 120 480 no INT 4805s dec 1 hex 01 Print Positioning 53 480 MOD 256 dec 224 hex EO ny Movement of 55 inches 1 67 inches towards the left side n 65536 1 67 120 65336 no INT 6983656 dec 255 hex FF n4 65336 MOD 256 dec 56 hex 38 Note that you obtain the same result by using the formula given for calculating n4 and no for absolute horizontal step See sequence ESC Only the method of calculations is different The two different methods give the same result and therefore the programmer should use the method best suited for his application Example 10 REM relative horizontal position 20 LPRINT CHRS 27 CHRS 224 CHRS 1 480 30 LPRINT CHRS 27 CHRS 56 CHRS 255 200 40 LPRINT CHRS 27 CHRS 50 CHRS 0 50 50 LPRINT 60 END 200 50 480 54 Print Positioning Vertical Tab Stops ESC B Data Structure Description ASCII ESC B lt ny gt lt nyg gt NUL set vertical tab stops o hex 1B 42 lt ny gt lt nyg gt 00 dec 27 66 lt ny gt lt nig gt 0 ASCII ESC B NUL reset all vertical tab stops o hex 1B 42 00 dec 27 66 0 O By means of this code sequence a maximum of 16 vertical tab stops can be set For example CHR 27 B CHR 1 CHR 11 CHR 21 CHR 0 sets vertical tab stops at lines 1 11 and 21 line 1 being
198. ine hex 85 dec 133 Description The code NEL moves the active position to the left margin of the next line This gives the same result as the combination of CR Carrigage Return and LF Line Feed 64 Print Positioning Graphics Graphic Modes ESC CSI 6z CSI 5z Data Structure ASCII ESC n mo n2 DATA C set dpi for graphics hex 1B 25 n ni SB n 3B DATA dec 27 37 n ni 59 n2 59 DATA ASCII CSI e z C graphics invers hex 9B 36 7A dec 155 54 122 ASCII CSI 5 2 C graphics unchanged hex 9B 35 7A dec 155 53 122 Description For n the following parameters are available n dpi 3 33 b1 graphics 60 dpi 4 34 52 graphics 120 dpi 5 35 53 graphics 80 dpi 6 36 54 graphics 240 dpi T 37 55 graphics 240 dpi 8 38 56 graphics 72 dpi 9 39 57 graphics 90 dpi Data following the graphic CSI sequence are printed out as dot pattern n and ns define the length of the data sequence Graphics 65 qp 66 Graphics The vertical resolution is 72 dpi The graphics image is printed vertically closed at a line feed of 80720 inch Also see the sequences Spacing Increment SPI page 15 and Set Line Spacing SLS page 26 Example CSI 80 SP G Example for calculation of n and ny The length of graphics is 80 bytes No number of bytes divided by 256 int 80 256 dec 0 hex 00 ny remainder of division of no 80 mod 256 dec 80 hex 50 Graphics data and text data can be mixed within one li
199. ing 10 cpi horizontal spacing 12 cpi horizontal spacing 15 cpi A 10 Summary of Possible Codes Sequence Page A is Aes ao SE cep laced an BRS a io ed 33 CESA Mita fa ace BOA ce cata tea Whe ta 33 GSIS n ina s fuis bete REEL pe RA 33 GS mou Rte uu ew o eth n 33 GSI ABM is o irse rai vui a 33 CSI 16 3 d TE ar AA Lets 33 CSI LZ Bares ant a A nara 33 CSI ASM he Fa ome NM ndo a 33 GSA OSM dr os teo a Rn 33 CSI 52 li Lu itum is a cc i acts co Rd OS s 89 ESA re RAE RU s ee ama 89 A aen au ust rers HORN aei tin a 5 GSln13 n2 SP Bo 4 iride aaa e 42 GS ni SP Ou rune wem nk alc Ru ux 42 CSI 4n1 n2 DATA 65 CSI 6 n1 n2 DATA 65 CSI 7 n1 n2 DATA 65 CSI 3 n1 n2 DATA 65 CSI 8 n1 n2 DATA 65 CSl965n1 n2 DATA 65 CSl969n1 n2 DATA 65 CSIO Z 4 i ate ud oS cd 65 CSI hata ae ad atate rase amp GR 65 CSL OS PX ee th arts ome uri Le eats s 31 CSI Gata ed oe eum dee 31 CSL0 SP Keen guid Beate eee eae ta te its 18 CSE2SP IK e d Lu re dt D n Eoi de 18 GS SPIR Ex doen uo ie uei t es 18 GS S3 SPII amp iia A RIDE ee aa he ces 18 OS ess E E ertum au uu Enn aT TRU 22 GS ure las Gee ned exti ders tad ee eh Gey ded 54 CSI iR deste etu auum 56 GOL figu dx ua owes RR teo Eo 55 CSI 12 W 2 s Gs uec EE euet 16 CSI Ws Scenes d AUI ad ime o PR E urs 16 GSO EDUC 16 CSIW m odes owes uc err teed fat c aues 16 Function horizontal spacing 17 1 cp
200. ing Unit BMU 14200 inch 0 02117 mm 6 36 54 Micrometer 0 001 mm 7 37 55 Pixels o This unit is machine dependent and may be of different size horizontally and vertically O O Page printers support typically 200 300 or 600 dpi matrix printers e g 180 or 360 dpi Example CSI 720 SP 1B 55 37 32 30 20 49 results in one inch By default the size unit is the decipoint Other size units may not be available due used printer type PUM must be set to ON see page 7 8 Paper and Text Formatting Set Top and Bottom Margin Clear Top and Bottom Margin Data Structure ASCII CSI m t no rm A set top and bottom margin hex 9B n 3B n 72 dec 155 m 59 n2 114 ASCII CSI r A clear top and bottom margin hex 9B 72 dec 155 114 Description n specifies the value of the top margin no specifies the value of the bottom margin ni ho 1 132lines ata line spacing of VY inch 6 Ipi 1 176 lines at a line spacing of 1 8 inch 8 Ipi Examples CSIn r set top margin set bottom margin to default CSI Or clear top and bottom margin CSI nar clear top margin set bottom margin Any change of margin settings is only effective from the next page on The setting of the top and bottom margins depends on the line spacing which is defined before setting the margins If line spacing is set after the setting of the top and bottom margins the margin positions on this page are not influenced If the form length is chang
201. int references are adjustable from the printer menu Extreme Left Position Character Printed at Zero Position CAUTION Do not attempt reverse paper motion across a perforation since this may cause the paper to snag on the print head Vertical position accuracy is not specified for reverse paper moves greater than 1 5 inches 7265 Programmer s Manual 22 Copyright 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 2 ANSI Vertical Movement Commands Description LF LINE FEED Advances the paper one line according to the spacing currently in effect Dec 10 Hex 0A VT VERTICAL TAB Advances paper to the next vertical tab setting If the current print position is at or beyond the last tab setting the paper advances to the top of form If no tabs are set then VT is processed according to the status of emulation option strap 14 Dec 11 Hex 0B EF FORM FEED Advances the paper to the top margin on the next form Dec 12 Hex OC ESCD INDEX IND Advances the paper to the next line The current column is not changed regardless of the status of auto CR on LF Dec 132 Hex 84 ESCE NEXT LINE NEL The next line character advances the paper to the next line The current column is reset to the left margin Auto CR on LF has no effect Dec 133 Hex 85 ESC M REVERSE INDEX RI Moves the paper back one line Dec 141 Hex 8D 7265 Programmer s Manual 23 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 2 ANSI Comma
202. ive hex 9B n 65 dec 155 n 101 Description n 1 default setting This sequence moves the print head lines or vertical positions down The unit depends on PUM Positioning Unit Mode and is either lines or defined by the SSU function Select Size Unit see page 8 Example CSI 12e move print position 12 lines or vertical positions down CSI e move print position one line down Positions beyond the bottom margin are ignored 58 Print Positioning Vertical Position Backward VPB CSI k Data Structure Description ASCII CSI n k A set vertical position backward hex 9B n 6B dec 155 n 107 n 1 default setting This sequence moves the print head lines or vertical positions upward The unit depends on PUM Positioning Unit Mode and is either lines or defined by the SSU function Select Size Unit see page 8 Positions beyond the top margin are ignored This sequence is not valid in Single Sheet Mode Print Positioning 59 Horizontal and Vertical Position Absolute HVP CSI f Data Structure ASCII CSI m no f B C set horizontal and vertical position absolute hex 9B m 3B n 66 dec 155 n 59 n2 102 Description n4 vertical position Ny horizontal position This sequence moves the print head to a horizontal and vertical print position absolute The unit depends on PUM Positioning Unit Mode and is either lines or defined by the SSU function Select Size Unit see page 8 Exa
203. l codes k ny x 256 n k ny INT zc k nL MOD 256 o Data is ignored if no character is assigned to that character in the active character table Miscellaneous 95 Printing Direction unidirectional for one line Set Reset Unidirectional Printing Data Structure ASCII ESC lt unidirectional printing for one line 11 hex 1B 3C dec 27 60 ASCII ESC U n orn set reset unidirectional printing o hex 1B 55 lt n gt orn dec 27 85 n orn Description O This code sequence sets unidirectional printing mode only for one line The printing is carried out from left to right O This code sequence sets or resets unidirectional printing mode Unidirectional printing is enabled when 1 is specified for n and is disabled when 0 is specified In text mode printing is faster when unidirectional printing is disabled However char acters on one line may be slightly shifted with respect to those in the preceding line when bidirectional printing is used qp In its default setting the printer is set to bidirectional printing 96 Miscellaneous Half Speed Printing ESC s Data Structure Description Example ASCII ESC s lt n gt hex 1B 73 lt n gt dec 27 115 lt n gt With n 1 the print speed is reduced by half The result is a lower printer noise level With n 0 the normal print speed is set 10 REM selects half speed printing 20 LPRINT This is full speed print in LQ mode
204. led You can toggle the status of the 8 bit control code enable from the Emulations Options Menu or with escape sequences The pertinent escape sequences are the ANSI private use sequences described on page 12 In 8 bit mode all of the lower contro codes and ESC sequences remain active For example you can use either PLD or ESC K for subscript printing In 7 bit mode only ESC K is available If 8 bit control code interpretation is disabled then the printer processes characters 80 hex through 9F hex according to IBM PC character sets 1 or 2 depending on which is currently selected The default is character set 1 You can toggle the character set selection from the Emulation Options Menu If 8 bit control code interpretation is disabled and character set 1 is active then the printer strips the most significant bit of characters 80 hex through 9F hex For example if you send 8A hex when 8 bit control code interpretation is disabled and character set 1 is active then the printer treats 8A hex as OA hex and performs a line feed 7265 Programmer s Manual 4 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom xade c imal Orde red Column Row 0 1 2 7 0 0 P p 1 DC1 1 A Q a q 2 2 B R b r 3 ETX DC3 3 C S C S 4 4 D T d t 5 ENQ 5 E U e u 6 ACK 8 6 F V f V 7 BEL 7 G W g w 8 BS 8 H X h X 9 HT 9 Y y A LF J Z j Zz B VT ESC K k C FF lt L D CR M
205. llowing commands are used to print barcode and LCP characters SUB Start Character Barcode header DLE Start Character LCP header EM Stop Character Barcode and LCP header DC4 Barcode brackets start and end characters for barcode data Sl LCP brackets start and end characters for LCP data ESC P ESC Settings for Barcode and LCP This may cause conflict with other emulations since the above commands may have dif ferent functions in these emulations for example Sl Condensed print DC4 Reset expanded print ESC P lt n gt Proportional spacing ON OFF ESC P Pica In barcode mode the barcode sequences have priority The barcode interpreter can be switched on or off with the MTPL sequences ESC 11 Barcode ON and ESC 10 Barcode OFF The typical transmission procedure should take place as follows Barcode Interpreter ON m Transmit mode specification barcode header LCP header secured unsecured mode m Transmit barcode LCP m Barcode OFF The mode specifications is saved temporarily and must only be sent to the printer once The specification remains valid until the printer is switched off Please note the following explanatory information Every sequence description begins with a header in which the function and short form of the sequence of the barcode Types are listed e g 2 5 Matrix Type A The header is followed by the data structure in ASCII hexadecimal and decimal repre sentati
206. mixed syntax 150 REM set form length up to 12 dos 160 REM The same sequence written in hexadecimal et 170 LPRINT CHRS amp H1B CHRS amp H43 CHRS amp HO CHRS amp HC 180 REM set form length up to 12 inch 190 REM The same e R in decimal syntax 200 LPRINT CHRS 27 CHRS CHRS 0 CHRS 12 210 REM set form length Us a 12 inch Paper and Text Formatting Form Length in Lines ESC C Form Length in Inches ESC C NUL Data Structure ASCII ESC C lt n gt set form length in lines 00 hex 1B 43 lt n gt dec 27 67 lt n gt ASCII ESC C lt 0 gt lt n gt set form length in inches ee hex 1B 43 0 n dec 27 67 00 lt n gt Description O This code sequence sets the form length to n times the current line feed pitch in in ches Also the current print position is simultaneously defined as top of form The value specified for n must be an integer in the range of 1 to 127 This value is mul tiplied by the current line feed pitch to obtain the form length For example if 60 is specified for n and the current line feed pitch is 1 inch the form length is set to 10 in ches Once set by this sequence the form length is not affected by changing the line spacing This code sequence is ignored if the value specified for n is not in the range of 1 to 127 O This code sequence sets the form length to the number of inches specified by n It also defines the current print position as top of form
207. mple CSIf move the print position to the top left position on page CSI20 35f move the print position to line vertical position 20 and horizontal character position 35 if PUM is turned off QD Note that during manual and automatic cut sheet feeding your printer can only reverse the form a limited distance 60 Print Positioning Backspace BS Data Structure ASCII BS A Backspace hex 08 dec 8 Description After receiving this code the content of line buffer is printed out Then the print head is moved one position to the left depending on the current values of cpi Carriage Return CR Data Structure ASCII CR A carriage return hex OD dec 13 Description When the printer receives this code it prints any data in the print buffer and resets the line pointer The active print position is set to the left margin first possible character posi tion The code CR can also give a line feed if automatic line feed is selected refer to Oper ator s Manual Print Positioning 61 Form Feed FF Data Structure ASCII FF A form feed hex 0C dec 12 Description When the printer receives this code it prints the data in the print buffer then advances the paper from the current pritn position to the top of form position on the next page Cut sheet Forms are ejected The first print position on the following paper is the first top physi cally possible position Fanfold paper The paper is moved by the form length given
208. must be blank or if dots are specified in this column they will automatically set to O The minimum width of a download character is 5 columns All of the download character data n1 to n11 must be sent to the printer Note also that if horizontally adjacent dots are specified they will be automatically ignored Computing the Attribute 9 needle printer The 8 bits that make up attribute A are broken down as follows Bit dec Part 1 When using normal matrix field this bit is 1 8 128 For descending matrix field it is O Part2 These 3 bits specify the first 7 64 column of the proportional character 6 32 5 16 Part3 These 4 bits specify the last column of the 4 8 proportional character 3 4 2 2 1 1 84 Download Character Generator Just add up the values of the three parts of the byte to get the value of A 1 Normal Descender First column is 1 First column is 2 First column is 3 First column is 4 First column is 5 First column is 6 First column is 7 First column is 8 Last column is Last column is Last column is Last column is Last column is Last column is 10 Last column is 11 Last column is 12 O 0 Y O OI Example Descender matrix field First column is 3 Last column is 10 128 odooo ooccd Total value of A Download Character Generator 85
209. n2 ESC ESC n ESC lt n gt ESC lt m gt ESC NUL lt n gt NUL ESC lt ESC ESC gt ESC lt s gt lt 0 gt ESC lt s gt lt 1 gt ESC lt s gt lt 2 gt ESC lt s gt lt 3 gt ESC s 4 ESC s 5 ESC s 6 ESC s 7 ESC s 32 ESC s 33 ESC s 38 ESC s 39 ESC s 40 ESC Q ESC nt n2 ESC m n1 n2 FX80 FX100 FX85 FX105 FX850 FX1050 LQ850 LQ1050 LQ850 LQ1050 LQ2500 LQ2550 LQ2170 SSS SSS SSS SS SSS amp SS amp S SSSRSSSSRSSSSS Cee S SSSSS S SS NEN NNN SGN NN SNS SN SNS SAS SSS SANSA SS KS SES KAS SANSA SSS XS SSNSSSSSSS SSSSSSSS S SSSS amp SS SSSSSSS SSSSSSSSSSS SS SSSSSSSSSSSSS SSSSSSS amp amp SSSSSSSSSSS NOUS SSS NS SS SS SS Function Page graphics 72 dpi llle 63 graphics 90 dpi llle 63 graphics 144 dpi llle 63 graphics 60 dpi o aoaaa a 63 graphics 120dpi nra ee 63 graphics 90 dpi vs c cs de on E oa 63 graphics 180 dpi oaa ooo 63 graphics 360 dpi aoaaa a 63 print raster graphics aoaaa aaa 76 variable line spacing n 360 inch 27 underline mode ON OFF 39 vertical tab channel selection 57 copy ROM character generator 75 unidirectional printing for one line 96 input data control bit8 0 107 input data con
210. nch 160 LPRINT 1234 send a symbol 170 LPRINT CHR 27 Ot turn off bar code 180 LPRINT hp rel delimiter YA DY 1234 1234 hp_rel delimiter Figure 3 5 Horizontal Position Relative Delimiter 7265 Programmer s Manual 45 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes Delimiters and Vertical Bar Codes If you rotate a bar code 90 or 270 then space imposed by delimiters is not rotated but is applied horizontally as the sample shows The symbol dimensions that used to be horizontal are shortened to 120 144 of what they used to be this includes the quiet zones 100 LPRINT CHR 27 4 9 1 3 of 9 110 LPRINT CHR 27 3g clear all h tabs 120 set horizontal tabs at 1 2 inch intervals 130 LPRINT CHR 27 860 720 1080 1440 1800 2160u 140 LPRINT CHR 27 0 9 1 3 3 2 150 FOR K 1TO6 show where the tabs are 160 LPRINT CHR 9 T 170 NEXT K 180 LPRINT 190 LPRINT CHR 27 3t turn on bar code 200 LPRINT 1234 CHR 9 5678 210 LPRINT CHR 27 Ot turn off bar code 220 LPRINT CHR 27 3t turn on bar code 230 LPRINT 2345 CHR 9 6789 240 LPRINT CHR 27 Ot turn off bar code T T T T T T B ES Figure 3 6 Vertical Bar Code Symbols 7265 Programmer s Manual 46 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes Calculating Characters per Inch We show characters per inch at the default element widths and 0 180 rotation for each style in th
211. nds Description ESC p e VERTICAL POSITION RELATIVE Advances paper p decipoints This command enables printing below the bottom margin of the current form and above the top margin of the following form The example below advances the paper 4 1 4 inches Example ESC 3060e Dec 27 91 51 48 54 48 101 Hex 1B 5B 33 30 36 30 65 ESC p k VERTICAL POSITION BACKWARDS Moves the vertical position backwards to p decipoints above the current position The horizontal position does not change If the target position is above the top margin then the vertical position is the top margin If no top margin is set and the target position is above top of form then the vertical position is top of form NOTE The printer economizes vertical motion with vertical logic seeking so this command may cause reverse paper motion in some instances and not in others Reverse paper motion can cause problems with some forms Example ESC 1080k moves the vertical position up by 1 5 inches Dec 27 91 49 48 56 48 107 Hex 1B 5B 31 30 38 30 6B ESC p d VERTICAL POSITION ABSOLUTE Moves the current print position to p decipoints from the top of the form The following example advances the paper to 2 inches below top of form Example ESC 1440d Dec 27 91 49 52 52 48 100 Hex 1B 5B 31 34 34 30 64 ESC p1 VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL POSITION ABSOLUTE p2 f Moves the print position to any coordinate on the page Coordinates are measured in decipoints Parameter p1 is the vertical coo
212. ne eo Relationship between graphics data and needles Needle Data byte 13 e Bit 7 45 e Bit 6 68 e Bit 5 9 10 0 Bit 4 1113 Bit 3 14 415 O Bit 2 16 18 O Bit 1 19 20 O Bit 0 Example 1 Relationship between graphics data and needles Needle Data byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 ON OO FW PD REM bit image print WIDTH LPT1 255 LPRINT CHR 27 3 CHRS 80 CHRS 0 GOSUB 100 LPRINT 60 dpi LPRINT CHRS 27 4 CHRS 80 CHRS 0 GOSUB 100 LPRINT 120 dpi LPRINT CHR 27 7 CHRS 80 CHRS 0 GOSUB 100 LPRINT 240 dpi END FOR N 1 TO 80 LPRINT CHR 255 NEXT N RETURN Graphics 67 Example 2 68 Graphics REM bit image print WIDTH LPT1 255 LPRINT CHRS 27 3 CHRS 10 CHRS 0 GOSUB 130 REM 60 dpi LPRINT wd ee GOSUB 130 REM 120 dpi LPRINT CHRS 27 6z LPRINT CHR 27 3 CHR 10 CHRS 0 GOSUB 130 REM reverse 60 dpi LPRINT CHR 27 5z LPRINT END RESTORE FOR I 1 TO 10 READ D LPRINT CHR D NEXT I LPRINT ms RETURN DATA 34 80 138 0 143 0 138 80 34 0 te TRA Ws Miscellaneous Load Menu CSI SP q Data Structure Description o ASCII CSI n SP q B load menu hex 9B n 20 71 dec 155 n 32 113 For n the following parameters are available n hex dec Loading of
213. ngle Shift 3 90 print 1 t1 Transfer And Print 100 Code 40hex French substitute 110 print 1 t2 Transfer And Print 120 Code 40hex default character 130 end 86 Miscellaneous Graphic description of locking shift single shift pages 81 86 lt ___ Active character set ices Invocation of one graphic character 3 A A Invocation of LS1R LS2R LS3R graphic sets GO G1 G2 G3 i ESC 02 8 F ESC 02 9 F ESC 02 13 F Desi nal f ESC 02 10 F ESC 02 4 F esignaton 2 ESC 02 11 F ESC 02 15 F graphic sets SS Repertoire of C control code set graphic sets G graphic sets Miscellaneous 87 Size of Character Set 1 Character Set CSI 50 h Size of Character Set 2 Character Sets CSI 50 Data Structure ASCII csi 5 Qo pm A loading a character set hex 9B 3F 35 30 68 with 256 characters o dec 155 63 53 48 104 ASCII CSI XM dew o e A loading 2 character sets hex 9B 3F 35 30 69 with 94 characters each o dec 155 63 53 48 105 Description In an 8 bit environment the MTPL standard allows the use of 2 character sets at the same time In this case each character set contains 94 and 96 characters respectively and can be allocated to the
214. nored User defined character substitutions do not work in oversized so you cannot use the IBM line draw characters The resident international character substitutions work the same as in normal text In contrast to the oversized function on earlier products the 7265 interprets escape sequences and control codes within an oversized string As of this writing however we recommend that you exit oversized before sending any other control functions To maintain compatibility with existing printers the 7265 printer does not back paper up to print oversized characters on the current baseline If you enter an oversized mode and immediately print one character then the top of the character is at the vertical position that was current when you entered oversized This is no problem if all characters on a line are the same size To mix oversized with either normal type or with different expansions on the same baseline however you will need to write a routine to find the baseline We cover this later in this chapter Some of the oversized control sequences are redundant The nonrotatable controls that let you optionally toggle oversized with SHIFT OUT and SHIFT IN are retained for compatibility with older printers You could reasonably choose to use only the escape sequences for rotatable oversized ESC Ps for new applications 7265 Programmer s Manual 63 Copyright 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 4 ANSI Oversized Control Function Summary
215. nt 120 DPI only 11 CPI at default element widths 3 8 12 Combined start stop character length 0 153 7265 Programmer s Manual 55 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes POSTNET Style 50 You cannot adjust POSTNET bar code attributes with ESC p1 p12 All attribute parameters except the style parameter p1 are ignored by POSTNET although they are processed saved and would apply to a subsequent bar code of another style if not overwritten To select POSTNET you need to send only ESC 50 You cannot print human readable characters with this bar code style There are three variations of POSTNET They are ZIP ZIP 4 and ABC The printer determines which variation is being called for by the number of characters in the symbol string Legal characters are the numerals 0 9 30 hex 39 hex and the dash symbol 2D hex which is ignored Any other printable characters in the symbol string cause an error character diamond to be printed ZIP 5 digits plus 1 check digit ZIP 4 9 digits plus 1 check digit ABC 11 digits plus 1 check digit The check digit is the digit that makes the sum of the digits in the symbol string including the check digit evenly divisible by 10 For example if you send the ZIP symbol string 12345 then the sum of those five digits is 15 so 123455 would be the complete ZIP symbol If you do not send a check digit then the printer compu
216. nt Characters CSI Pn SP r Data Structure ASCII CSI Pn SP e hex 9B Pn 20 72 dec 155 Pn 32 114 Description Up to 16 numeric parameters The parameter represents the decimal code of a printable character If no parameter is specified the sequence is ignored Example CSI 129 SPr Print Umlaut u if character set is PC table 437 90 Miscellaneous Printer Identification DA Data Structure Description 0 ASCII hex dec ASCII hex dec CSI 9B 155 CSI 9B 155 CSI c o c B request for printer indentification 30 63 48 99 PU uno ot Response from printer 3F 63 e3 99 By this functions it is possible to get for example informations of device type and firmware revision or some capabilities like paper supply bins of the connected printer This sequence can only be used if the printer is connected to a computer with a serial interface or another bi directional interface Miscellaneous 91 Device Status Report DSR CSI n Data Structure ASCII CSI n n B device status report hex 9B n 6E dec 155 n 110 Description For n the following parameters are available n hex dec status report direction 0 30 48 Ready no malfunction printer computer 1 31 49 Busy no malfunction printer computer 3 33 51 Some malfunction detected printer gt computer 5 35 53 Request of device status report computer gt printer By these sequences it is possible to requ
217. nt mode selection 20 LPRINT CHRS 27 D CHRS 40 CHRS 0 30 FOR N 0 TO 255 STEP 7 40 LPRINT CHR 27 CHRS N 50 LPRINT Matrix Printer CHR 9 CHRS 27 CHR 0 N 60 NEXT N 70 END Matrix Printer Merit Printer Merit Printer Matrix Printer Matrix Printer Matrix Printer Matrix Printer Matrix Printer Matrix Printer Matrix Printer Matte Printer Matrix Printer Matrix Printer Matrix Printer Matrix Printer Matrix Printer Matrix Printer Matrix Printer Matrix Printer Matrix Printer Matrix Printer Matrix Printer Matrix Printer Matrix Printer Matrix Printer Matrix Printer Matrix Printer Matrix Printer Matrix Printer Matrix Printer Matrix Printer Matrix Printer Matrix Printer Matrix Printer Matrix Printer Matrix Printer 189 196 203 210 217 224 231 238 245 252 Character Styling 45 Double Height ESC w Data Structure ASCII ESC w lt n gt double height ON OFF hex 1B 77 lt n gt orn dec 27 119 lt n gt orn Description By means of this code sequence the characters of the subsequent text are specified with double height ESC w followed by n 1 hex 01 or hex 31 sets double height printing To reset the double height to the normal height specify n 0 hex 00 oder hex 30 The line spacing is not altered This command cannot be combined with superscript sub script or condensed print commands ESC w with parameter n 0 hex 00 or hex 30 resets character represe
218. ntation back to normal character height Example 10 REM double height 20 LPRINT for 20 LPRINT CHR 27 w CHRS 1 30 LPRINT Headlines 40 LPRINT CHR 27 w CHRS 0 50 LPRINT double height printing is recommended for Head L LNES double height printing is recommended 46 Character Styling Print Positioning Horizontal Tab Stops ESC D Data Structure Description ASCII ESC D lt ny gt lt ng93 gt NUL set horizontal tab stops o hex 1B 44 lt ny gt lt ng gt 00 dec 27 68 lt ny gt lt ng gt 0 ASCII ESC D NUL clear all horizontal tab stops o hex 1B 44 00 dec 27 68 0 O This code sequence is used for setting or clearing horizontal tab stops It replaces all previous tab stops and can be used to set a maximum of 32 tab stops For example CHR 27 D CHR 1 CHR 1 1 CHR 21 CHR 0 sets horizontal tab stops at positions 1 11 and 21 position 1 being the position of the first character at the left margin Double width printing does not influence the physical positions of tab stops Tab stops are set in those positions which are specified by character codes following ESC D These character codes must be arranged in ascending order The length of this code sequence varies according to the number of tab stops being set Code hex 00 is used as a terminator to signal the end of the data string If a character code with a smaller numeric value than the preceding is among those codes the
219. nted all the way to the bottom With the sheet feeder activated this command is ignored Activates the paper end sensor As soon as a certain area near the lower paper edge is reached an acoustic signal sounds and the printing process is interrupted Miscellaneous 115 Control Codes BEL BS CAN CR DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 116 hex 07 dec 7 hex 08 dec 8 hex 18 dec 24 hex 0D dec 13 hex 11 dec 17 hex 12 dec 18 hex 13 dec 19 hex 14 dec 20 Control Codes Sounds acoustic signal Print contents of line buffer then move the print head one position back When auto right justification is selected by code sequence ESC a lt 3 gt lt BS gt will be ignored When the printer receives this code the print buffer is deleted This code only clears the contents of the print buffer it does not affect any control codes which have previously been sent to the printer When the printer receives this code it prints any data in the print buffer and resets the line pointer to the left margin Code CR can also give a line feed if automatic line feed is selected Refer to the Operator s Manual The control code DC1 switches the printer into Online Mode If the printer has been set Offline with the control code DC3 then DC1 is the only control code which can be carried out DC1 has no effect if the printer has been set Offline via the control panel DC1 and DC3 have no effec
220. ode sequence switches the automatic underline function ON or OFF When the automatic underline function is ON all printed characters including spaces are automat ically underlined The automatic underline function is ON when 1 is specified for n and is OFF when 0 is specified Once the printer receives ESC lt 1 gt all subsequent characters including spaces are automatically underlined until ESC lt 0 gt is received Spaces between tab codes HT will not be underlined The characters hex BO to hex DF hex 176 dec 223 and hex FO to hex FE dec 240 dec 254 of the extended EPSON graphics character set cannot be underlined using this mode Example 10 REM underline mode 20 LPRINT the most 30 LPRINT CHRS 27 CHRS 1 40 LPRINT important 50 LPRINT CHR 27 CHR 0 60 LPRINT word must be underlined 70 END the most important word must be underlined Character Styling 39 Score Selection ESC Data Structure ASCII ESC lt 8 gt NUL 1 lt ny gt no hex 1B 28 2D 03 00 01 nj no dec 27 40 45 3 0 1 n4 no Description This Escape sequence switches on and off the underscore overscore and strike through modes The lines can be single or double broken or continuous n loc no type loc ny The parameter n indicates the location of the score to be printed The following values are avaiable 1 hex01 underscore mode 2 hex02 strike through mode 3 hex03
221. ol code DEL Delete control code ENQ Enquiry for Status control code ETX End of Text Block control code FF Form Feed control code HT horizontal step A 8 Summary of Possible Codes Sequence Page BE ree it ey O TN 97 GSL Di SB ie tbe s d ha hh odo eee 20 GS Ou 2 ick edu dauern xor deed 70 ESTA Zi a NEA a 70 a A stakes ys deer 8 GSLE21 T5 o ue Dr gO pt dtr ow IR 76 CS8122m na2 ol sn 76 CSI23m na o o 76 CSIs La a de e 72 CSO yi eae bape iN ID Pie tp pus 14 GSLE2 m aha we ae la wed he bo rs dvi 72 CSLAS PE Oian puta oe OE S 19 GSL 3g ses dnas ees he So Oe Ren 46 CSI2 02st e He pier iui 46 GSLO Gar tine 2 AI rA A 33 CSIMG ena a Sees ooh ia E 52 ESTATE uua eiu uou 52 CSO e gute alo ta 46 GS 90i a a e ek rhs d gs 72 GSL 34m sue e ah Se RSL dt Pk at 72 CSS Mia Pia a BP uS 72 EA A Sotto RR URP 72 CSI S5 Ms 2 eure reas uei NE A 72 GSlS DI Arc a toe don 72 EST miu mec RIS m EE uw Te 72 ESTIMA seo usa 72 ACIE 2L nSE S ndo ee e ERE OON E Rees 95 BS cxsuoiqnore unb S RU ae NOUS HH wee 61 CANE 155 cette RO edad 96 CRE oue fester da eon vo at Min 61 DEL x zone we A Eck 97 ENQ erunt tst e dete den 93 ETX alias dar ee dun 95 EF kou e ocius e se eie 62 HY oui RV RUD Bi 45 Function control code HTS control code IND Vertical Index control code LF Line Feed control code NAK Negative Acknowledge control code NEL Next Line control code NUL fill character control code PLD
222. ol sequences for 23 resident bar code styles You have to be in ANSI emulation to print the resident bar codes You can adjust various bar code attributes including rotation height print density status of the human readable line and element widths Subject to some constraints based on style and rotation the human readable font is also selectable For some styles the printer will calculate checksum characters for you To print a bar code symbol you need to 1 Set the printer to ANSI emulation 2 Send the escape sequence to set the user adjustable attributes Always do this at least once 3 Send the control sequence to turn on bar code 4 Send the ASCII representation of symbol data you want to encode 5 Send the control sequence to turn off bar code 6 Send a line terminator at some point thereafter In bar code parlance a module is the narrowest nominal width of measure while an elementis a single bar or space A characteris a group of elements that represents a number letter or punctuation mark A symbol is a group of characters that can stand alone in terms of being interpreted by the reader A symbol always comprises one or more data characters framed by white spaces known as quiet zones The symbol frame almost always includes start and stop characters Depending on the style some bar code symbols can also include check characters center characters and guard bars Among printers that generate bar codes internally and
223. on with the necessary parameters e g ASCII DC4 startcode n n stopcode DC4 hex 14 startcode n n stopcode 14 dec 20 startcode n n stopcode 20 Introduction 3 4 Introduction The syntax for the parameters the start separate and stop code is represented as follows Figures n Start code Stop code ASCII o to 9 em el hex 30 to 39 3A 3A dec 48 to 57 58 58 For the parameter here n a distinction must be made between two types of repre sentation m if the parameter is in pointed parentheses the decimal value must be transmitted m if the parameter is not in pointed parentheses the ASCII value must be transmitted Example Parameter representation to be transmitted Parameter representation to be transmitted n with n 0 dec 0 hex 00 n with n 0 ASCII 0 hex 30 dec 48 Character explanation and symbol descriptions o O en Information important notes Optional must be not necessarily be transmitted 9 needle printer 24 needle printer Special Feature If you not get the required control codes for Barcode of ASCII code table columns 0 and 1 out of your computer you can use in addition to these Barcode control codes a set of MTPL sequences to generate these control codes by printable ASCII characters By this measure the Barcode programs will remain fully compatible in spite of the additional MTPL sequences Following con
224. one form to another If there is any advantage to that approach it is that the vertical move will not depend on the current form length When printing bar codes on labels you can greatly simplify your task by setting a form length that exactly matches the length of your physical form and then using form feeds to make vertical moves between labels or rows of labels If you print nothing but text then the vertical position following each line feed lies on a grid that is evenly spaced according to the line feed increment If you print a bar code symbol then positions established by subsequent line feeds may not be on that grid The vertical position following a bar code symbol becomes the origin for a subsequent line feed this new origin must be computed based on bar code height and the status of the human readable line If you do not initialize your vertical position with a form feed for each row of labels then printed objects may creep cumulatively up or down with respect to the top of your physical form 7265 Programmer s Manual 34 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes Setting Bar Code Parameters The ANSI control sequence that sets bar code parameters has the format Command Description ESC Set Up Bar Code Parameters p1 p2 p3 p4 p Determines bar code parameters to be used when bar code mode is enabled S See following sections 13 Dec 2791 p1 59 p2 59 p13 125 Hex 1B 5B p1 3B p2 3B p13 7D Bar
225. ormat In the header the printing parameters the barcode size and the barcode type are defined This header only needs to be transferred once unless settings are to be changed or the printer has been turned off Header Format Format SUB F a n xyz EM Specification is optional x y uUunregarded at EAN UPC Barcode For Code 128 and EAN 128 Type S T only the X parameter is valid This is automatically used for the Y parameter The Z parameter is not evaluated Meaning of the characters SUB hex 1A dec 26 F a ASCII a A n ASCII n 0 ASCII x ASCII x 0 y ASCII y 0 Zz ASCII z 0 EM hex 19 dec 25 For encoding ASCII Character Sets 8 Barcode Printing eo 90 gr 3 3 Start header Print feature see section Barcode Print Feature F to select the F codes page 10 Barcode Types see section Barcode Types Barcode height in n 6 inch At n 0 the barcode height equals to 1 12 inch Separation character Width of the narrow bar see section Barcode width Width of the narrow space see section Barcode width Ratio of wide to narrow see section Barcode width End of header values to decimal or hexadecimal values refer to the appendix Transparent Barcode LCP commands The default parameter values are the following m Unsecured mode see section Secured Unsecured mode HRI OFF Normal Print Double Pass F SP Barcode Type 2 5 matrix a 2 A Barcode
226. ounting the printed lines This function only applies for fanfold paper not for cut sheet processing or with mounted sheet feeder 10 Paper and Text Formatting Example 10 REM skip 20 LPRINT CHRS 27 C CHRS 6 30 LPRINT CHRS 27 N CHRS 1 40 FOR F 1 TO 2 50 FOR L 1 TO 5 60 LPRINT form F line L 70 NEXT L NEXT F 80 END form 1 fine 1 form 1 line 2 form 1 line 3 form 1 line 4 form 1 line 5 form 2 line 4 form 2 line 2 form 2 tine 3 form 2 line 4 form 2 line 5 REM form length REM set skip Paper and Text Formatting 11 Right Margin Left Margin Data Structure ASCII ESC Q lt n gt set right margin o hex 1B 51 lt n gt dec 27 81 n ASCII ESC lt n gt set left margin o hex 1B 6C lt n gt dec 27 108 lt n gt D ipti di Values for n Character 80 columns 136 columns density printer printer 10 cpi 1 80 1 136 12 cpi 1 96 1 163 15 cpi 1 120 1 204 17 1 cpi 1 136 1 232 20 cpi 1 160 1 255 Values for n are valid for a line length of 8 inch 80 columns printer or 13 6 inch 136 columns printer set in the menu The absolute margin position depends on whether enlarged print mode compressed print mode Pica or Elite are selected When using proportional spacing the setting of the mar gins corresponds to the setting when in Pica font type 10 cpi The command for setting the margins must be given at the beginning of a line all data of the s
227. our job requires the associated higher resolution of bar code height A non zero value of p13 supplants the value of p2 Caution In some versions of the printer a non zero value of p13 supplants all subsequent values of p2 until you ISU that printer To be on the safe side if you do not plan to use p13 then set p13 to 0 NOTE Bar code height is limited to 10 inches 7265 Programmer s Manual 41 Copyright 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes Delimiters A bar code delimiter is a character or control function that tells the printer where one bar code symbol ends and an adjacent symbol begins Different bar code styles accept different delimiters which might be spaces commas asterisks horizontal tabs or horizontal position relative commands Valid delimiters for the various styles are listed in the Bar Code Style Characteristics section There is always a minimum one fourth inch of white space called the quiet zone on either side of a bar code symbol so there is always an irreducible half inch space between adjacent symbols no matter which delimiter is used The space character occupies an additional tenth of an inch Neither the comma nor the asterisk imposes any additional space between symbols Asterisks are valid delimiters in Code 3 of 9 style 4 only and are normally used in pairs 110 LPRINT CHR 27 0 9 1 120 LPRINT CHR 27 3t 140 LPRINT 001234 001234 150 LPRINT CHR 27 Ot 160 LPRINT comma delimit
228. overscore mode type n2 The parameter n indicates the type of score to be printed The following values are avaiable hex 00 cancel scoring selected by n loc hex 01 single continuous line hex 02 double continuous line hex 05 single broken line oun oOo hex 06 double broken line This command can be used more than once to activate the underscore strike through and overscore modes at the same time with different line types This mode cannot be used to underscore strike through or overscore block graphic char acters 40 Character Styling Example 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 1 REM Score Selectio n LPRINT CHRS 27 CHRS 3 CHRS 0 CHRS 1 CHRS 1 CHRS 2 LPRINT 1 pede inde Double continous Line LPRINT CHRS 27 CHRS 3 CHRS 0 CHRS 1 CHRS 2 CHRS 2 LPRINT 2 Strike through and Underline i continous line REM cancel strike through e continous line LPRINT CHRS 27 CHRS 3 CHRS 0 CHRS 1 CHRS 2 CHRS H LPRINT CHRS 27 CHRS 3 CHRS 0 CHRS 1 CHRS 2 CHRS 1 LPRINT 3 St rike through ae continous line ids LPRINT Underline Double continous line REM cancel underl ine double continous CIUS LPRINT CHRS 27 A CHRS 3 CHRS 0 CHRS 1 CHRS 1 CHRS 0 LPRINT CHRS 27 CHRS 3 CHRS 0 CHRS 1 ere ay cH LPRI
229. oversized printing 4 2 2 select expanded printing 4 2 3 select bar code 3 6 Oversized printing and bar codes are explained in separate chapters When expanded printing is selected the current font is expanded horizontally and vertically in 100 increments according to expansion factors specified by ESC p1 p2 lt SP gt B see page 11 The range of expansion is 1x through 8x Example select expanded printing Dec 279150116 Hex 1B 5B 32 74 ESC p1 GRAPHIC SIZE MODIFICATION p2 lt SP gt B Sets the size of expanded and oversized characters The effect of this command on oversized is explained in a separate chapter When expanded print is selected the argument units for parameters p1 and p2 are percentages of the vertical and horizontal dimensions of the current font Parameter p1 controls the vertical expansion and p2 controls the horizontal expansion The argument limits for expanded print are 800 800 8x the parent font size Oversized enables much larger expansions Parameters are rounded down to the nearest 100 Note This printer goes into expanded mode immediately on receiving this command Any text between this sequence and a countermanding ESC p1 t sequence see page 11 is printed according to the specified expansion If height and width are different values the height will be set the same as the width ESC p1 SET MODE ANSI pn h p Effect 20 auto CR on LF Dec 27 91 50 48 104 Hex 1B 5B 32 30 68 7265 Programmer s Manual
230. p of that character cell where top of cell means the character cell boundary that is uppermost on the paper This is true whether or not you are still in oversized when the vertical position relative command is sent 7265 Programmer s Manual 70 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 4 ANSI Oversized Implementing the Line Feed Function 0 A good technique is to exit oversized with ESC Ot and send a vertical and horizontal position absolute command ESC Pv Ph f where Pv is decipoints from the top print reference and Ph is decipoints from the left print reference The logic seeking of the printer minimizes redundant paper motion associated with position absolute commands You could also use vertical position relative to implement line feeds Try a line feed increment of 1 2 decipoints times the vertical expansion factor If you send a line feed character while in oversized then paper advances five dot rows for the 0 rotation 7265 Programmer s Manual 71 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 4 ANSI Oversized Line Spacing and Intercharacter Spacing 270 If you print sideways text then the vertical move that otherwise corresponded to a line feed now sets the distance from the leading edge of one character cell to the leading edge of the next character cell as you read the characters A good starting value for this move is the character cell width which is 0 6 decipoints times the horizontal expansion factor Strings
231. pacing these two a spacing these two a spacing 28 Line Spacing es are printed with 20 216 inches lines are printed with of 30 216 inches lines are printed with of 40 216 inches Character Styling Super Subscript Mode ON Super Subscript Mode OFF Data Structure ASCII ESC S lt n gt orn super subscript mode ON 11 hex 1B 53 lt n gt orn dec 27 83 lt n gt orn ASCII ESC T super subscript mode OFF o hex 1B 54 dec 27 84 Description O This code sequence switches the printer to superscript or subscript mode The printer is switched to superscript mode when 0 hex 00 or hex 30 is set for n and to subscript mode when 1 hex 01 or hex 31 is set The subsequent characters are printed with about 2 of their normal height either in the upper or lower half of the cor responding character location If superscript or subscript characters are underlined the underline character is printed at its normal position The characters hex BO to hex DF dec 176 dec 223 and hex FO to hex FE dec 240 dec 254 of the extended EPSON graphics character set cannot be set to superscript or subscript mode O This code sequence resets the superscript or subscript mode to normal mode Character Styling 29 Example 10 REM superscript and subscript 20 LPRINT E M C 30 LPRINT CHRS 27 S CHRS 0 40 LPRINT 2 50 LPRINT CHRS 27 T 60 LPRINT is Einsteins most famous formula 70 LPRINT H 80 LPRINT CHRS
232. ph lt SP gt B where pv is the vertical expansion ph is the horizontal expansion and lt SP gt is the space character 20 hex For 0 rotation you can think of parameter pv as 10 times the point size of the oversized character If you set a 600 x 600 expansion and print an uppercase E at zero rotation then the resulting character will nearly match the 60 point Helvetica E on a typesetter s scale A sideways character shares neither the size nor the aspect ratio of a vertical character printed at the same expansion factors Relationships between expansion and character dimensions for 270 rotation reflect differences in the horizontal and vertical resolutions of the printer in oversized mode Remember to always follow the graphic size modification command immediately with either ESC Ot or the desired oversized mode selection if you do not want to drop into expanded mode Device Timeout with Very Large Characters Normally one byte of data in the printer s input buffer represents one text character which takes milliseconds to print If our host creates a huge character using dot graphics then one byte of data in the buffer corresponds to one dot column If we set oversized however then one byte of data can command the printer to render several hundred thousand dot columns A big oversized character can take a while to print If we fill the printer s input data buffer while a big oversized character is printing then
233. print mode activate deactivate double height double strike print mode OFF double strike print mode ON emphasized mode OFF emphasized mode ON enlarged print mode automatically reset after one line enlarged print mode automatically reset after one line font type selection Sequence Page ESC lt ni gt lt n2 gt 2 ee 51 NU a cus ni Senet tos neni e EX ps 117 ESC o uum a asa 105 ESCA nx uc a haw a Steed EV do 98 BEE a o cae n nasa de Sent ee a 116 EGG Pi omues lo atacan nl daa ir da Ab OS 21 ESGIM zc a NS sued nt 21 ESOO ardt EIU ERU 21 ESAS 4 coe trie o MA rc Mer ct a 103 ESCSP n crime tc Edu 24 ESCD NUES 4 neath end lt embed ake eR 47 ESC b lt m gt lt 0 gt 2 2 ca hee bee ee es 57 ESG SNS a Vote ene e dern a ele 99 ESC vii te a AOS da te tak odd 20 rt aia hos dv 20 ESG M IS usa arte tg a af som ee 18 DO aa eke oe een aoe FRG EN RI 116 CAN 725 oett ts E Ee ste IR hae Mtge a A 116 O O se nae 116 DEL a a is A d reed ad oy Ea 116 ESC tae 117 ESC lt 0 gt n m 2 o 75 ESC amp s lt X gt y A oo oon 92 ESC amp NUL lt x gt y A ooo 80 ESC amp NUL lt X gt y do o oo 88 ESC zd yin Sadie a Et Gru on bea dla AE rd 112 ESC Wels id LA oe a SE md ee AS 46 ESG Cc M 31 ESC da me E nite ays SE RANA 31 EGG Eo foun aes sce V as ado Eutr cut iod 5o d 38 ESG pest Sd vei a de n 38 ESC SOS ina OE ete tet NI TRA s 18 DO cok rictus ur Me sen A atro su EL cd a 18
234. quest for device status report 0 e 92 El AAA IN 76 Basic Measuring Unit BMU a 8 horizontal spacing 12 cpi 0 lens 16 NEQ at 12 Cpl 27 uk dou a aa le dde ta ts A 31 graphics NORMA senros pea A Grand K ATRN RA Gea 65 proportional mode OFF o o e eee eee 37 move paper to normal print position llle 76 move paper to tear off position lll 76 move paper to view position lll 76 overline mode N 22e a Dg e qve UR a dom e dE EC dud 40 overline mode OFF 2e 40 reset to initial state lens 79 size unit Micrometers 22e 8 horizontal spacing 15cpi 2 2 ee 16 graphicsinvers ls 65 size unit Pixels 22e 8 Summary of Possible Codes A 5 Sequence Function Page CSI 7 w horizontal spacing 17 1 cpi o o 16 CSI7 y proportional mode OFF 0 00 eee ee ee ee 37 CSI7z set bit 8 unchanged 2l 74 CSI8 w double strike OFF arie booed a A Ea 41 CSI 8 y right justification ON 2 2l 14 CSI 8z Set biIEO EQ un uu eer veuve aspe bo wee e eei 74 CSI9 SPL vertical spacing 2 lpi o aaa a 24 CSI 9 w double strike ON 22s 41 CSI 9 y centering ON 2 ee 14 CSI 9z Seb DIL O S V xum vp hie cnn ITE ENTIISENUTSIRRUISCR UMEQENEU Boxes 74 CSIn horizontal position absolute llle 54 CSIn 4y direct setting of the p
235. racter Table ESC t Data Structure Description Do np np d4 do da 74 nj np d4 do da 116 nj ny d4 do da ASCII ESC hex 1B 28 dec 40 Valid values nL 3 Ny 0 O lt d lt 3 48 lt d lt 51 0 lt d lt 255 0 lt dz lt 255 assign character table Assignes the choosen character table to the register d 0 3 The ESC t command see page 103 can be used to activate the defined character set do d3 Table name 0 0 Italic 1 0 Table 437 US 3 0 Table 850 Multilingual 7 0 Table 860 Portugal 8 0 Table 863 Canada French 9 0 Table 865 Norway 10 0 Table 852 East Europe 11 0 Table 857 Turkish 14 0 Table 866 Russian 24 0 Table 861 Iceland 25 0 BRASCII continued on next page Miscellaneous 105 do d3 Table name 26 0 Abicomp 29 16 ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 35 0 Roman 8 127 2 ISO 8859 2 Latin 2 o Please refer to the printer s reference manual which character sets are supported 106 Miscellaneous Input Data Control Bit 8 1 Input Data Control Bit 8 0 Input Data Control Bit 8 unchanged Data Structure ASCII ESC gt set bit 8 1 hex 1B 3E dec 27 62 ASCII ESC set bit 8 0 hex 1B 3D dec 27 61 ASCII ESC Removing the settings set for Bit 8 MSB most significant bit hex 1B 23 which were set with the
236. rameter not specified is assigned its default value Maximum form length is 15840 decipoints 22 inches Default Values p1 7920 decipoints 11 inch form p2 0 decipoints 0 inch top margin p3 0 decipoints 0 inch bottom margin p4 0 decipoints 0 inch top print reference p5 0 decipoints O inch left print reference Example Set 8 inch form length one inch top margin one inch bottom margin Dec 27 91 53 55 54 48 59 55 50 48 59 55 50 48 114 Hex 1B 5B 35 37 36 30 3B 37 32 30 3B 37 32 30 72 Note Before you send this command verify that the top print reference is zero in the target paper path One way to do this is to park and then load paper in the target path The top edge of the paper should line up with the top of the print head If not then set the top print reference to zero from the menu and save the change to the format associated with the target paper path You must once again park and load paper in the target path in order for the new print reference to take effect Next send a command to set the vertical position absolute to zero If you do not do this then the printer establishes top of form at the current top margin and form registration is lost 7265 Programmer s Manual 20 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 2 ANSI Superscript Subscript Command Description ESC K SUBSCRIPT PRINTING PLD Moves paper 1 2 line below the current line for subscript printing ESC K is used to return to the original line
237. rdinate which is measured from the top print reference Parameter p2 is the horizontal coordinate which is measured from the left print reference The computation of absolute positions is not influenced by margin settings Top and left print references are adjustable from the control panel You can print characters beyond the left top and bottom margin setting but no printing is allowed beyond the right margin EXAMPLE ESC 1440 2160f Prints the next character 2 inches from the top print reference and 3 inches from the left print reference Dec 27 91 49 52 52 48 59 50 49 54 48 102 Hex 1B 5B 31 34 34 30 3B 32 31 36 30 66 7265 Programmer s Manual 24 Copyright 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 2 ANSI Margins Use the Forms Setup command page 2 39 to set vertical margins Commands Description ESC p1 6 p2 s SET LEFT AND RIGHT MARGIN Sets the left and right margin in decipoints p1 is the left margin and p2 is the right Distances are measured from the left print reference This command takes effect following the next line terminator you cannot set margins for the current line EXAMPLE Set the left margin at 0 4 inch and right margin at 6 9 inches making a 6 5 inch print line Dec 27 91 50 56 56 59 52 57 54 56 115 Hex 1B 5B 32 38 38 3B 34 39 36 38 73 ESC s ASSIGN MARGIN DEFAULTS Assigns the default parameters Sets the left margin to zero right margin to maximum print line width of the printer This
238. rent print position and the end of the page or if there are no vertical tabs set VT assumes the same function as LF Appendix A Summary of Possible Codes Sorted by sequences Sequence BEL BS CAN CR DEL DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 ESC ESC lt n gt ESC ESC lt n1 gt lt n2 gt ESC NUL ESC lt 1 gt ESC amp NUL x y lt A gt ESC amp NUL x y lt do gt ESC amp NUL x y lt do gt ESC lt 3 gt NUL n1 n2 ESC v ESC lt 0 gt lt n1 gt lt n2 gt ESC lt 1 gt lt n1 gt lt n2 gt ESC lt 2 gt lt n1 gt lt n2 gt ESC lt 3 gt lt n1 gt lt n2 gt ESC lt 4 gt lt n1 gt lt n2 gt A 2 Summary of Possible Codes FX80 FX100 FX85 FX105 FX850 FX1050 LQ850 LQ1050 LQ850 LQ1050 LQ2500 LQ2550 LQ2170 ANN SES SNS SS SSSSSSSRSSSSSSS SS SENSE NNN SS SS SS SSSSSSNSSSSSSS SASS SS SS SSS SENS AS SS SS SN SSSNSSSSSSSSSS SENN NNN NS NNN NNN SS Sk Sb GO OO OG OO OO GS XS NON S S SS SSSSSSSSSSS S SSSSSSSSS NSSSS SS SAS AS SSSSS SS SWASSS NSSSSS SGA GAS Function Page Bell At tava GY yea ta dal edhe oh Sak 116 Control Code BS Backspace 116 Control Code CAN Cancel 116 Control Code CR Carriage Return 116 Control Code DEL Delete 116 set printer online 116 reset condensed print o o o 20 set printer offline lr 116
239. right margin has been set to column 41 END Now the Left margin is set to column 10 and the right margin is set to column 53 Now the Left margin has been reduced to column 5 and the right margin has been set to column 41 12 Paper and Text Formatting Set Line Home SLH CSI SP U Set Line Limit SLL CSI SP V Data Structure ASCII CSI n SP U A set line home o hex 9B n 20 55 dec 155 n 32 85 ASCII CSI n SP v A set line limit o hex 9B n 20 55 dec 155 n 32 85 Description n 1 maximal print area O Default setting Physical left margin of medium or device n specifies the left margin The first position is 1 The unit depends on PUM Positioning Unit Mode and is either characters or defined by SSU Select Size Unit see page 8 Example CSI SP U reset to physical left margin CSI 10 SP U set left margin to position 10 O Default setting Physical right margin 1 of medium or device n specifies the right margin The unit depends on PUM Positioning Unit Mode and is either character positions or defined by SSU Select Size Unit see page 8 Example CSI SPV reset to physical right margin CSI 80 SP V set right margin to position 80 Paper and Text Formatting 13 Right Justification ON Centering ON Right Justification and Centering OFF Right Justification and Centering OFF Data Structure ASCII CSI n y justification hex 9B n 79 dec 155 n 121 Description For n the following charac
240. rint head distance inn steps 70 CSIna horizontal position relative 0 o e ee ee 55 CSInd vertical position absolute 0 o llle 57 CSIne vertical position relative ooa 58 CSI nj horizontal position backward leen 56 CSI nk vertical position backward o o e eee 59 CSInp Horizontal Motion Index 2 a 22 CSInq horizontal Step 9 ox ws Ee RR Re EUR Re BR Bree WO ae NO ms 23 CSI n SP additional character spacing o 20 CSIn SPC graphic size selection 2n 42 CSI n SP f reduced character spacing ee eee 21 CSI n SP g character spacing lll 19 CSInSPh ine SPACING xod EUR RU Oe A ROROESROM A 26 CSIn SPU line NOME Aa aci a A hopes Geek dog PEOR Ren 13 CSIn SP V line limits zn seeded ICM E rey isCopedene Xi ed eee 13 CSI nt fomlenghtinlInes E 5 CSIn v vertical tab stop o e ee 52 CSI n1 n2 SP B graphic size modification 0 o o eee 42 CSI n1 n2f horizontal and vertical position absolute 60 CSI ni ner top and bottom margin e e o 9 CSI ni nes left and right margin aoaaa 11 CSI n1 n2 SPD Selectfont zo sex ve euis IW aoa A xs 43 CSI n1 n2 SP G spacing increment 22h 15 CSI ntu set horizontal tab stop 2l 46 CSI Pn SP r print transparent characters o
241. rinter Data Control 1 Deselect printer Data Control 3 Delete Enquiry Escape String Terminator Reset to Initial State RIS Index Next line Horizontal Tab Setting Vertical Tab Setting Partial Line Down Partial Line Up Reverse Index Enter Dot Graphics Mode Device Control String Sets bar code parameters GENBC Select Graphics Rendition SGR Character Pitch Print Modes and Color Ribbon color Graphic Size Modification GSM Left Right Margin Set GENSLR Sets horizontal tab stops at specified positions Multiple Horizontal Tab Set GENHTS Tab Clear TBC Sets vertical tab stops at specified positions Multiple Vertical Tab Set GENVTS Form Definition GENFD Sets the line character spacing Set Mode SM Reset mode RM Horizontal Position Absolute HPA Horizontal Position Relative HPR Vertical Position Absolute VPA Horizontal Position Backward HPB Vertical Position Backward VPB Select Graphics Mode Density GENGRM Special Print Mode Oversize Expanded Bar code Mode GENSPM Horizontal and Vertical Position Absolute HVP Vertical Position Relative VPR End of transmission Form Feed Horizontal tab Line Feed Ignored Operating System Command ESC Shift In Shift Out Space Vertical tab Commands not implemented in the 7265 ANSI Emulation ESC p1 pn lt ST gt User Defined Character Substitution GENUDS ESC p1 p2 p3 data lt ST gt Operating system command Load
242. rmation for column 2 ng needle information for column 3 N41 needle information for column 11 This code sequence assigns the character pattern defined by ny no nz to n44 as down load character to ASCII codes x to y If the download character is only being assigned to one character code specify x y A determines the descender and proportional print attributes 80 Download Character Generator Defining Character 9 Needle Printer COLUMNS 12345 67 8 9 1011 12 Each downloaded character is defined in a matrix 8 field of 9 rows high and 12 columns wide ogo COLUMNS It is only possible to use column 1 up to column 11 A RAD d Column 12 is the space between one character 128 and the next Therefore it is always left blank by automatically setting dots in column 12 to zero Also only 8 of 9 dots in any one column can be printed see also Descenders Each column is defined by a single byte where each row in that column corresponds to the LSB dec 1 and the top row to the MSB dec 128 64 32 ns0J Download Character Generator 81 Example 9 needle printer COLUMNS The following example illustrates the definition of a bab S dieu charact
243. rn set print quality PQ hex 1B 78 lt n gt orn dec 27 120 lt n gt orn Description Selected via control panel DPQ NLQ LQ DPQ DPQ DPQ LQ NLQ LQ Valid values for n are either ASCII Code O and 1 hex00 and hex 01 or ASCII characters 0 and 1 hex 30 and hex 31 Example 10 REM print quality 20 LPRINT CHRS 27 x1 This is high print quality 30 LPRINT CHR 27 x0 and this is draft print quality 40 END This is high print quality and this is draft print quality 34 Character Styling Font Type Selection ESC k Data Structure ASCII ESC k lt n gt hex 1B 6B lt n gt dec 27 107 n Description Corresponding to the value specified for n one of the printer s internal fonts or a font of an optional font card is selected Please refer to the printers reference manual which fonts are supported by your printer type This sequence is not valid in Draft Mode Example depending on the printer O Roman 11 Quadrato 1 S Serif 12 Kyrillic 2 Courier 13 Arabic 3 Prestige 14 A Arabic ll 4 Script 15 Farsi 5 OCR B 16 Farsi Il 6 OCR A 7 Modern 20 Roman T 8 Kaufmann 21 S Serif H 9 Gothic 10 Helvetica 66 Courier These fonts can be selected also via the menu of the printer Roman T and S Serif H are scaleable fonts Character Styling 35 Example 10 REM font selection 20 LPRINT CHRS 27 x1 REM high print quality 30 FOR i 0 TO 9 40 LPRINT CHRS 27 k CHRS 1 50 LPRIN
244. s 0 1 between the bottom edge of the bar code and the top of the characters in the human readable line Element Widths The default element widths are the narrowest that we recommend for consistent readability The argument units for horizontal bar code element widths are 1 120 inch The print wire diameter is 1 72 inch a printed dot is about 1 60 inch in diameter This is the finest line that the printer can make The printer accepts an element width of 1 as a valid argument but the actual width of the resulting element is 1 60 inch the same as if you had specified a width of 2 If the element width argument is greater than 2 then the printer rounds down odd numbers A width argument of 5 produces the same result as a width argument of 4 p4 Narrow Bar Width Argument units are 1 120 inch if the bar code is horizontal 0 or 180 rotation or 1 144 inch if the bar code is vertical 90 or 270 rotation The default is 2 p5 Wide Bar Width Argument units are 1 120 inch increments if the bar code is horizontal or 1 144 inch if the bar code is vertical The default is 6 p6 Narrow Space Width Argument units are 1 120 inch increments if the bar code is horizontal or 1 144 inch if the bar code is vertical The default is 2 p7 Wide Space Width Argument units are 1 120 inch increments if the bar code is horizontal or 1 144 inch if the bar code is vertical The default is 6 Wide space and wide bar are both set to th
245. s in the printer s menue Character Sets B 3 Programmer s Reference Tally ANSI Barcode and LCP Table of Contents Barcode and LCP Printing Introduction Secured Unsecured Mode Data Structure Description Barcode Printing Barcode Header Header Format Transparent Barcode LCP commands Barcode Print Feature F for Selection of F Code Barcode Types HR ia a a Barcode Width Error Code Data Formats of Barcode Types Code Matrix 2 5 Code 2 5 Industrial Code 2 5 Interleaved Code 11 Code BCD Matrix Code39 CODABAR Code EAN 8 with HRI Code EAN 8 without HRI 10 11 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Code EAN 13 with HRI o Code EAN 13 without HRI Code MSI modified Plessey Code UPCA with HRI o o e Code UPCA without HRI 0 o Code UPCE with HRI o e Code UPCE without HRI o o Delta distance IBM lll Code 128 EAN 128 Add On Barcodes Check Number Calculation UPCE Add On5 Add On2 US Postnet Barcode Sequence Description eae Large Character Printing LCP LCP Header LCP Data LCP Character Set Selection Various Examples Exemples 1 4
246. s is double strike printing 60 END this is normal printing and this is double strike printing Character Styling 41 Graphic Size Selection GSS CSI SPC Graphic Size Modification GSM CSI SP B Data Structure ASCII CSI n SP C B graphic size selection 0 hex 9B n 20 43 dec 155 n 32 67 ASCII CSI m n2 SP B A graphic size modification o hex 9B m 3B n2 20 42 dec 155 m 59 n2 32 66 Description Q n specifies the hight of the used font The units are either decipoints or defined by the SSU function Select Size Unit See page 8 The width is implicitly defined by the height Example CSI 120 SPC set 12 point font 120 decipoints O ni specifies the height of the used fonts default setting 100 n2 specifies its width default setting 100 These parameters are given as a percent value of the size establishment by sequence O Example CSI SP B standard height and width CSI 50 50 SP B half sized characters e g for indices or exponents CSI 200 200 SP B double sized characters e g for headlines CSI 100 67 SP B compresses a 10 pitch font for 15 cpi dh If the selected character size is not printable the next available character size is used 42 Character Styling Font Designation FNT Data Structure Description CSI SPD ASCII CSI m n SP D A designate font hex 9B n 3B ne 20 44 dec 155 n 59 n2 32 68 n4 font number 0 9 Ny identification ID of the desired font
247. scoring etc being active during the tab is ex ecuted apply also to the whitespace produced by two tab stops Set Horizontal Tab Stop at Current Position HTS Data Structure ASCII HTS A set horizontal tab stop hex 88 dec 136 Description This code sets a tab stop at the current horizontal position Print Positioning 45 Horizontal Tab Stops ON CSI u ESC H Horizontal Tab Stops OFF TBC CSI g Data Structure ASCII CSI m u A set horizontal tab stop o hex 9B m 75 dec 155 mnm 117 ASCII ESC H C set horizontal tab stop at current position hex 1B 48 dec 27 72 ASCII CSI n g A clear all horizontal tab stops e hex 9B n 67 dec 155 n 103 Description o Print width 8 inches Print width 13 6 inches n4 1 80at 10 cpi 1 136 at 10 cpi 1 96at 12 cpi 1 163 at 12 cpi 1 120 at 15 cpi 1 204 at 15 cpi 1 136 at 17 1 cpi 1 232 at 17 1 cpi 1 160 at 20 cpi 1 272 at 20 cpi Values for n are valid for a line length of 8 inches 80 column printer or 13 6 inches 136 column printer set in the menu Up to 16 tab stops can be joined in one sequence as follows CSI n4 ng n3 nqgU The parameters do not have to be sorted The positions of the horizontal tab stops depend on the current character density O This sequence is interpreted as a Epson IBM sequence ESC H LQ off if the emula tion MTPL Epson IBM is set 46 Print Positioning With the sequence CSI n g for n t
248. sheet feeder eject paper 108 emphasized mode OFF 38 horizontal step forward 50 vertical step forward aoaaa ee ee 50 double strike print mode ON 31 FX80 FX100 FX85 FX105 FX850 FX1050 LQ850 LQ1050 LQ850 LQ1050 LQ2500 LQ2550 LQ2170 SS SS SS NN SS SNe Sas SSSSSS SSS S SS ESC K lt n1 gt n2 SSSSSSS S ESC L n1 n2 NNUS NNSSSSUUSSNS SSS amp S SSSSS SSS SAR SSI SS SSSS SSSSSS amp S SSSSSSSSSSS S S SSSS SOSA SAS SS NS SSSSSSSRSSS Ss SSS SSIS SSS SS SISSI SS SS SSSSSSRSS amp S SSSSSSSSSSSSS S Function Page character density 15 cpi 21 double strike printmodeOFF 31 printout of control codes 113 direct print mode activate deactivate 112 line feed n 216 NCh o o oo o o o o o oo o 98 back feed n 216 inch o o oo o o oo ooo 98 graphics 60 dpi o o o o o o ooo 63 font type selection Roman 35 font type selection Gothic 35 font type selection Courier 35 font type selection Prestige 35 font type selection Scrip 35 font type selection OCR B 35 font type selection OCR A 35 font type selection Orator 35 font type selection Orato S 35 graphics 120 dpi o o o ooo ooo 63
249. should clear all tabs before setting tabs Note also that new tab stops do not take effect until you send a line terminator in other words you cannot set tabs for the current line The superfluous tab stops in the following example are included to show you how the function works If you use horizontal tabs for delimiters then set no more tab stops than you plan to use 100 LPRINT CHR 27 4 9 1 3 of 9 110 LPRINT CHR 27 39 clear all h_tabs 120 set horizontal tabs at 1 2 inch intervals 130 LPRINT CHR 27 360 720 1080 1440 1800 2160u 150 FORK 1TO6 show where the tabs are 160 LPRINT CHR 9 T 170 NEXT K 180 LPRINT 190 LPRINT CHR 27 3t turn on bar code 200 LPRINT 1234 CHR 9 1234 210 LPRINT CHR 27 Ot turn off bar code T T T T T T US DY Figure 3 4 Horizontal Tab Delimiter 7265 Programmer s Manual 44 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes Horizontal Position Relative Delimiter The horizontal position relative command is a valid delimiter in all bar code styles except POSTNET ESC Pn a The argument units for this command are decipoints 1 720 inch which the printer rounds off to the nearest 1 120 inch This command is a valid delimiter even when issued with an argument of zero 110 LPRINT CHR 27 4 9 1 height 3 4 hr on 120 LPRINT CHR 27 3t turn on bar code 140 LPRINT 1234 send a symbol 150 LPRINT CHR 27 720a hp relative 1 i
250. ssible ESC 4 screen graphics 80 8 possible E ESC lt 5 gt E plot 1 1 72 8 possible ESC 6 screen graphics II 90 8 possible ESC lt 7 gt E plot double density 144 8 possible ESC lt 32 gt ED single density 60 180 24 possible ESC lt 33 gt double density 120 24 possible ESC lt 38 gt screen graphics II 90 24 possible ESC lt 39 gt ED triple density 180 24 possible ESC lt 40 gt ED sixfold density 360 24 not possible 64 Graphics Example for Calculation of n4 and no The number of graphics data columns is 80 no number of data divided by 256 80556 dec 0 hex 00 n rest of division of no dec 80 hex 50 Relationship between bits of graphics data and needles 9 needle version Each needle in a column is assigned a bit of the data byte Needle 0 JO 01 25 0o vv Data Byte 1 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Relationship between bits of graphics data and needles 24 needle version When using 24 pin graphics modes three bytes of data are required for each dot column Needle 0 JO 0 2 Cc D Data Byte 1 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Needle Data Byte 2 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Needle Data Byte 3 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit
251. st be used Characters which use row 0 cannot use the top needle or row 8 of the matrix field Bit 8 of the attribute determines whether the matrix field is shifted down one row or not 3 Normal matrix field row 1 up to row 8 is used by setting bit 8 to 1 Descender matrix field row O up to row 7 is used by setting bit 8 to 0 See Computing the Attribute 0 ns 0J L normal descender Download Character Generator 83 Proportional Data 9 needle printer Not all characters are the same size W is considerably wider than i In the proportional print mode it is necessary to specify how much space a character takes by specifying the first and last printable columns in that character s matrix Seven bits of the attribute are used for specifying the print position of a character within its matrix The three high order bits of the seven bits of proportional data represent the starting position of the character in the print area and the remaining four bits indicate the ending position All characters in proportional mode are printed as emphasized characters Therefore when defining a download character for printing in proportional mode specify the ending print position one or more blank columns greater than the actual width of the character This is also true for enlarged mode o The maximum print area width of a download character is 12 columns but column 12
252. step width o hex 1B 65 01 lt n gt dec 27 101 1 n O This sequence sets the horizontal step width n according to the current character den sity When an HT command is received a horizontal tab stop is carried out The following maximum values apply for n 21 Pica 25 Elite 36 narrow Pica 42 narrow Elite The horizontal tab stop positions are set relative to the left margin O This sequence defines the vertical step width n as the number of line feeds correspon ding to the line spacing set for LF On receipt of a VT command a vertical tab stop is carried out The following maximum values apply for n O n lt 127 D n lt 255 Print Positioning 49 Horizontal and Vertical Step Forward ESC f Data Structure ASCII ESC f NUL n Set horizontal step forward O hex 1B 66 00 lt n gt dec 27 102 0 lt n gt ASCII ESC f SOH lt n gt Set vertical step forward o hex 1B 66 01 lt n gt dec 27 102 1 n Description At the next print position n spaces without carriage return CR are inserted As soon as this command is received all data in the buffer are printed This command is igno red when justification is activated If the next print position is on or beyond the right margin a line feed is carried out and printing starts at the left margin O On receipt of this sequence the printer carries out n line feeds corresponding to the current line spacing A carriage return CR is not carried out As soon as this
253. t Character Escape ESC Data Structure ASCII ESC A start character ESC hex 1B dec 27 Description ESC is the start character for a subsequent program sequence the string can be used instead of ESC if option is selected in the printer setup MTPL Start Character Control Sequence Introducer Data Structure ASCII CSI A MTPL start character CSI hex 9B dec 155 Description MTPL start character for a subsequent program sequence Do not use CSI in any other printer command language than MTPL Use instead ESC if using other emulations 98 Miscellaneous Appendix A Summary of Possible Codes Sorted by Sequences Function ACK BEL BS CAN CR CSI CSI 3 4 n2 DATA CSI 4 n1 n2 DATA CSI 965 n4 n2 DATA CSI 6 n1 n2 DATA CSI 96 7 n1 n2 DATA CSI 96 8 4 n2 DATA CSI 9 n1 ne DATA CSI y CSI z CSI gt z CSI 1 CSI 10 CSI 11 CSI 2 CSI 3 CSI 4 CSI 5 CSI 501 CSI 50h CSI 51h CSI 511 CSI 52h CSI 521 CSI 53h CSI 531 CSI 6 CSI 7 CSI 0 y CSIO z Sequence Page control code ACK Positive Acknowledge 95 ACOUSTIC akM sist wi daa o Bate Gad ea deg bu ui 97 control code BS Backspace o llli 61 control code CAN Cancel 0 llle 96 control code CR Carriage Return o ls 61 MTPL start character for program sequence 98 graphics 60 dpi
254. t if the Centronics interface signal SELECT is switched off LOW Reset condensed print mode The control code DC3 switches the printer into Offline Mode If the printer has been set Offline with the control code DC3 then DC1 switching printer Online is the only control code which can be carried out If the printer has been switched Offline via DC3 it can only be switched into the Online mode again using DC1 and not via the control panel DC1 and DC3 have no effect if the Centronics interface signal SELECT is switched off LOW Reset enlarged print mode set by lt SO gt DEL ESC FF HT LF NUL SI SO hex 7F dec 127 hex 1B dec 27 hex 0C dec 12 hex 09 dec 9 hex 0A dec 10 hex 00 dec O hex 0F dec 15 hex 0E dec 14 Clear previous characters in the print buffer Start character for a subsequent program sequence When the printer receives this code it prints the data in the print buffer then advances the paper from the current print position to the top of form position on the next page The next line is beginning at the left margin This code causes the following characters to be printed starting from the first horizontal tab stop after the current print position When the printer is switched on tab stops are set at every eighth print position The amount by which the print position is shifted by tabulation depends on the selected character spacing Wh
255. t type by specifying n 0 The value specified for n must be in the range of O to 255 See the following table for pos sible values of n Print mode selection byte 7166 54 13 2 1 0 0 Pica 10 cpi 1 Elite 12 cpi AAA Proportional Condensed Bold Double Strike Enlarged Italic Underline Mode Character Styling 43 Stan Con En Cond Propor Prop LQ LQ dard densed larged enlarg tional enlarg enlarged Pica normal 0 4 32 36 2 34 0 32 emphas 8 40 18 50 8 40 double 16 20 48 52 em double 24 56 Pica italic normal 64 68 96 100 66 98 emphas 72 104 82 114 double 80 84 112 116 em double 88 120 Pica normal 128 132 160 164 130 162 128 160 underlined emphas 136 168 146 178 136 168 double 144 148 176 180 em double 152 184 Pica italic normal 192 196 224 228 194 226 underlined emphas 200 232 210 242 double 208 212 240 244 em double 216 248 Elite normal 1 5 33 37 double 17 21 49 53 Elite italic normal 65 69 97 101 double 81 85 113 117 Elite normal 129 133 161 165 B underlined double 145 149 177 181 Elite italic normal 193 197 225 229 underlined double 209 213 241 245 44 Character Styling Example 10 REM pri
256. tart code Stop code ASCII hex SR tapie SSPE none none dec section Description Data Structure ASCII DC4 n n DC4 hex 14 n n 14 dec 20 n n 20 Description While many barcode styles are limited to numbers Code 128 can encode numbers let ters and other symbols commonly found on keyboards such as O and The Code 128 barcode is like three barcodes in one The three barcode styles are called Code A Code B and Code C Each barcode style is designed to encode certain types of data in the most compact way Code A encodes uppercase alpha numeric and control codes Code B encodes upper and lower case alpha and numeric codes Code C encodes digits in pairs A single Code 128 barcode may consist of all three Code 128 barcode styles A B and C The printer chooses the styles which result in the most compact Code 128 barcode for the data to be encoded Thus the user needn t be concerned about choosing the correct barcode styles as this is done automatically The gt greater than symbol is a special character prefix If a character with decimal va lue less then 32 needs to be encoded i e a control character then send a gt followed by the character that is decimal 64 higher then the control code character Control characters are conflicting with DC4 SUB these characters are encoded by using the gt sign following a number that is 64 dec higher than the control character Barcode Printing 31 Example If yo
257. ter Cells In the oversized font on the other hand characters are left justified in the cells This lets you print a larger character when you are printing say one huge character on a sheet The 7265 printer prints as much of an oversized character as will fit between the margins If your character is going to be clipped at the right margin then you might rather clip the side bearing than clip a printed portion of that character In the oversized font the topmost dot in the uppercase E for instance is centered on the upper boundary of the character cell The lowest dot on the descender of the lowercase j is centered on the lower boundary of the character cell 7265 Programmer s Manual 68 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 4 ANSI Oversized Oversized Character Dimensions 0 The width of an oversized character cell is 0 72 decipoints times the horizontal expansion factor In thousandths of an inch it is the same as the horizontal expansion factor If you set a horizontal expansion of 1000 then characters will be 1 inch or 720 decipoints apart i 1 I i 0 72 x Ph gt 0 9 Pv Figure 4 3 Vertical Character Dimensions The height of an oversized character cell is 0 9 decipoints times the vertical expansion factor In thousandths of an inch it is 1 25 times the vertical expansion factor If you set a vertical expansion of 1000 then the top of the uppercase E is 1 25 inches or 900
258. ters are available n hex dec justification 8 38 56 A right justification ON 0 9 39 57 A centering ON o 10 31 30 49 48 A right justification and centering OFF 3 3A 58 C right justification and centering OFF Q Leading blanks will not be corrected Blanks at line end will be ignored O The text is centered between the active margins 14 Paper and Text Formatting Character Spacing Data Structure Spacing Increment SPI CSI SP G ASCII CSI ni ne SP G B C set spacing increment hex 9B ni 3B no 20 47 dec 1551 ni 59 no 32 71 Description n4 specifies the line spacing n specifies the character spacing The unit is expressed in decipoints or other units defined by SSU Select Size Unit see page 8 For this note also the sequence Set Line Spacing SLS on page 26 Example CS1120 0 G 6 lpi basic cpi CSI90 60 G 8lpi 12 cpi The default setting of the spacing increment normally is 10 cpi n 0 The distance is reset to the values set in the printer menu Character Spacing 15 Horizontal Spacing CSI w Data Structure Description ASCII CSI n w A set cpi hex 9B n 77 dec 155 n 119 For n the following parameters are available n hex dec horizontal spacing 0 30 48 5 cpi 1 31 49 6 cpi 2 32 50 7 5 cpi 3 33 51 B C 8 6 cpi 4 34 52 10 cpi 5 35 53 12 cpi 6 36 54 15 cpi 7 37 55 B C 17 1 cpi 11 31 31 4949 B C 20 cpi 12 3132 4950 C 10 cpi 10
259. ters you want to encode and again to convert the computed checksum back to a valid 3 of 9 character The check digit is the modulus 43 sum of all the character values in a given symbol 1 Compute the check character for the character string 12345ABCDE 2 Sum the values of the characters based on their locations in the 3 of 9 character table 1 2 3 4 5 10 11 12 134 14 40 115 3 Compute the modulus 43 of the sum 115 43 2 Remainder 29 4 The check character is the character corresponding to location 29 in the 3 of 9 character table which is T Send to the printer 12345ABCDE T Code 3 of 9 Character Table oloi NIIA AIIN O 11 0 12 C 24 O 36 minus sign 1 13 AA BP 37 s period aa TT 267 O N space ee ee UA 2597 1 A EA 4 16 G 2 S 40 EON A ao bal 83 SET tl MEN MEA A EE A n 23 N 35 z Calculating the Checksum for CODE 93 A Code 93 symbol consists of a start code a variable number of data characters two check digits referred to as C and K and a stop code The values used to compute the checksum for a Code 93 symbol are the locations of individual characters in the Code 93 character table Check digit C is the modulo 47 sum of the character values and a weighting sequence where the weights from right to left are in the sequence 1 2 3 19 20 1 2 3 19 20 Check digit K is the modulo 47 sum of the character values and a weig
260. tes it and prints it If you do send a check digit the printer compares your check digit with its internal computation and if the two numbers do not agree then an error character is printed 7265 Programmer s Manual 56 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes 1 Bars per character 2 tall bars and 3 short bars N Character set 0 through 9 Co Start characters 1 tall bar Stop characters 1 tall bar Center character code None NULL character diamond symbol Intercharacter gap Yes NIOJ A A Characters per symbol ZIP 5 1 check character ZIP 4 9 1 check character ABC 11 1 check character 8 Check digit yes If a check digit is not sent then the printer adds it If a check digit is sent then the printer verifies it If a user supplied check digit is wrong then an error character is printed 9 Delimiters Space comma horizontal tab 10 HR characters none 7265 Programmer s Manual 57 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes Calculating the Checksum for Code 3 of 9 A 3 of 9 symbol is a variable length string which can include the digits O 9 uppercase A Z and six additional punctuation characters The values used to compute the checksum for a 3 of 9 symbol are the locations of individual characters in the unique 3 of 9 character table Your program will need to refer to a 3 of 9 look up table to acquire values for the charac
261. the first line of the page Tab stops are set in those positions which are specified by character codes following ESC B These character codes must be arranged in ascending order The length of this code sequence varies according to the number of tab stops being set Code lt NUL gt hex 00 is used as a terminator to signal the end of the data string If any character code with a smaller numeric value than the preceding is among those codes the code with the smaller value is ignored Vertical tab stops set by this sequence remain effective until code sequence ESC B is received again or form length is changed by ESC C A vertical tabulation is executed by the VT control code hex OB dec 11 This code sequence cancels all previous tab stops For example CHR 27 B CHR 0 clears all vertical tab stops Print Positioning 55 o When the printer is switched on no vertical tab stops are set Example 10 REM 60 LPRINT CHRS 50 LPRINT CHRS 70 LPRINT CHRS vertical tabs 20 LPRINT CHRS 27 30 LPRINT CHRS 27 40 LPRINT CHRS vertical is the second vertical 80 END this is the first this this is the third 56 Print Positioning vertical z r1 Lt 1 this is the first tab tab tab C CHRS 10 REM set form vertical this is the second vertical this is the third vertical line 3 line 5 line 9 length B CHRS 0 REM clear all
262. tion ESC O printer initialization DC2 reset condensed print DC4 reset enlarged print mode set by lt SO gt or ESC lt SO gt ESC g character density 15 cpi ESC M character density 12 cpi Elite ESCP character density 10 cpi Pica ESCp proportional spacing ON OFF ESC SP character spacing ESC W continuous enlarged print mode ON OFF Sl condensed print ON SO enlarged print mode automatically reset after one line Character Spacing 17 Set enlarged Print Mode SO ESC SO Reset enlarged Print Mode DC4 Continuous enlarged Print Mode ESC W Syntax ASCII SO or ESC SO set enlarged print mode for one line 11 hex OE or 1B OE dec 14 or 27 14 ASCII DC4 reset enlarged print mode o hex 14 set by SO or ESC SO dec 20 ASCII ESC W lt n gt orn set reset continuous enlarged print mode e hex 1B 57 n orn dec 27 88 n orn Description O Either one of these codes switches the printer to the enlarged print mode In enlarged print mode the width of printed characters are twice that in the normal mode Enlar ged printing can be used with all print qualities Enlarged print mode set by SO or ESC SO is reset by LF CR FF VT ESC ESC W 0 and DC4 O This code resets the printer from enlarged print mode to normal standard size mode The code is ignored except when the printer has been set to enlarged mode by SO or ESC SO It does not affect the enlarged mode set by ESC W or by ESC se quences This code sequenc
263. trol bit8 1 107 reassign graphics mode o 107 reassign graphics mode o o 107 reassign graphics mode o o 107 reassign graphics mode o 107 reassign graphics mode o o 107 reassign graphics mode o 107 reassign graphics mode o o o 107 reassign graphics mode o o 107 reassign graphics mode 107 reassign graphics mode o 107 reassign graphics mode o o 107 reassign graphics mode o o o 107 reassign graphics mode o o o o 107 printer initialization 114 relative horizontal Step 53 select 9 dots graphics mode 71 Summary of Possible Codes A 3 FX80 FX100 FX85 FX105 FX850 FX1050 LQ850 LQ1050 LQ850 LQ1050 LQ2500 LQ2550 LQ2170 Sequence ESC 0 ESC 1 ESC 2 ESC 3 lt n gt ESC 4 ESC 5 ESC 6 ESC 7 ESC 8 ESC 9 ESC A lt n gt ESC a n ESC B NUL ESC B lt n1 gt lt n16 gt NUL ESC b m NUL ESC b m n NUL ESCc ESC C NUL n ESC C n ESC D NUL ESC D n1 n32 NUL ESCE ESCe ESC EMO ESC EM 1 ESC EM2 ESC EM 4 ESC EMR ESCF ESC f NUL n ESC f SOH n ESC G vVvvvwvwvwvwv SSSSSS S SSSGSS AK NSSSSSS S SVAN SS SSSSSS S S SSSSS SGSS GSSSSRGSGSGSS SS S S SSSSS SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS SONO ONS LSS SNS
264. trol codes in Barcode strings can be substituted by the appropriate ANSI se quences ANSI Sequence Control Code esa hs s S T Example Hex ESC SUB CSI 26 Space s 1B 5B 32 36 20 73 EM CSI 25 Space s 1B 5B 32 35 20 73 DC4 CSI 20 Space s 1B 5B 32 30 20 73 DLE CSI 16 Space s 1B 5B 31 36 20 73 Sl CSI 15 Space s 1B 5B 31 35 20 73 ANSI sequences with not matching parameters will be ignored o These feature is not available with all printers with MTPL emulation Special firmware is possibly necessary Please ask your dealer or representative Introduction 5 Secured Unsecured Mode Unsecured mode ESC PSCO ESC Secured mode ESC PSC1 ESC Data Structure Description ASCII ESC P S Cc D ESC v Unsecured mode hex 1B 50 53 43 30 1B 5C dec 27 80 83 67 48 27 92 ASCII ESC P S C 1 ESC Y Secured mode hex 1B 50 53 43 31 1B 5C dec 27 80 83 67 49 27 92 In secured mode the amount of space the barcode or LCP character requires is secu red In each line additional barcode and normal characters can be printed These additional characters are printed in the current line and in the following lines wi thout influencing the barcode or LCP character As a result normal characters can be prin ted to the right or left of the barcode or LCP character in each line In order to guarantee successful barcode and LCP character printing it is important to in sert the correct paper feed commands so that paper
265. u need to print a Carriage Return hex 0D dec 13 as part of a barcode you need to send gt M 13 64 77 see character set table to verify that decimal 77 equals the capi tal letter M This substitution process can be carried out throughout the range of deci mal values i e gt d decimal 100 equates to the dollar symbol decimal 36 If the grea ter than symbol itself must be transmitted send gt 0 the 0 will not be part of the printed data The Code 128 barcode style selection can also be done manually This is done by adding a style selection character to the beginning of the barcode data Choose code A B or C from the table of special characters below Special Character Code 128 gt 0 30 gt 1 95 2 96 gt 3 97 gt 4 98 gt 5 99 Code C gt 6 100 Code B gt 7 101 Code A gt 8 102 When a style selection has been made character data will be translated from the selec ted code style to the Code 128 repesentation The translation table on the following page summarizes this 32 Barcode Printing Code 128 translation table Wert Code A Code B Code C Wert Code A Code B Code C Wert Code A Code B Code C 0 Space Space 00 36 D D 36 72 BS h 72 1 01 37 E E 37 73 HT i 73 2
266. umbers Character n Start code Stop code not fixed not fixed recommended recommended ASCII o to 9 A to D and a to e and a to e and T neg n ig nee Tb Wee n E Wee hex 30 to 39 and 61 to 65 and 61 to 65 and 24 2B 2D 2E 2F 3A 6E 74 2A 6E 74 2A dec 48 to 57 and 97to101and 97 to 101 and 36 43 45 46 47 58 110 116 42 110 116 42 Data Structure ASCII DC4 Startcode n n Stop code DC4 hex 14 Startcode n n Stopcode 14 dec 20 Startcode n n Stopcode 20 Example 10 REM codabar barcode 20 LPRINT CHR 27 11 30 LPRINT CHR 26 G3 111 CHRS 25 40 LPRINT CHR 20 123 CHR 20 50 LPRINT CHR 27 10 20 Barcode Printing Code EAN 8 with HRI Type H Syntax Data Structure Example Figures n Check Start code Separation Stop code Number c code ASCII o to g Calculation n m Walt see section hex 30 to 39 Check Number 3A 3A 3A dec 48 to 57 Calculation 58 58 58 ASCII DC4 Start code nnnn Separation code nnnc Stop code DC4 hex 14 Starttcode nnnn Separation code nnnc Stop code 14 dec 20 Startcode nnnn Separation code nnnc Stop code 20 10 REM code EAN 8 with HRI 20 LPRINT CHR 27 11 30 LPRINT CHR 26 H3 111 CHR 25 40 LPRINT CHRS 20 0123 4567 CHRS 20 50 LPRINT CHR 27 10 0123 4567 Barcode Printing 21 Code EAN 8 without HRI Type
267. uple density 90 LPRINT CHRS 27 K CHRS 60 CHRS 0 100 FOR Z 1 TO 60 REM 60 Columns 110 LPRINT CHRS 255 CHRS 255 CHRS 255 130 NEXT Z 140 END Graphics Printing with 9 Print Dots ESC Data Structure Description ASCII ESC lt m gt n4 no hex 1B 5E lt m gt n4 no dec 27 94 lt m gt n4 no With this Escape sequence graphics printing with 9 print dots per dot row is selected For each row of dots two graphics bytes are required The first byte controls the upper eight print dots and the second controls only the lowest print dot m O selects normal graphics resolution 60 dpi m 1 selects double graphics resolution 120 dpi The data following the graphics ESC sequence are printed as a dot pattern The parame ters n1 and n2 define the number of graphics bytes Print Head Data Byte Value Needle 1 60 Bit 7 128 2 Bit 6 64 3 e Bit 5 32 4 0 Bit 4 16 Byte 1 5 e Bit 3 8 6 e Bit 2 7 0 Bit 1 2 8 e Bit O 1 9 e Bit 7 128 Byte 2 Graphics 71 Example for the calculation of n1 and n2 The number of graphics bytes is 80 No number of bytes divided by 256 80256 dec 0 hex 00 ny remainder from division of no dec 80 hex 50 Graphics and text data can be used in combination in a line o For 9 print dots graphics printing two graphics bytes must be transferred per column 72 Graphics Download Character Generator General Your printer offers you
268. use of either ESC or ESC gt dec 27 35 Example 10 REM input data control 20 LPRINT CHR 27 4 30 GOSUB 90 40 LPRINT CHRS 27 gt 50 GOSUB 90 60 LPRINT CHR 27 70 GOSUB 90 80 END 90 FOR I 97 TO 103 LPRINT CHR I NEXT I 100 FOR I 161 TO 167 LPRINT CHRS 1 NEXT I 110 LPRINT LPRINT 120 RETURN abcdefg Z 2 amp abcdefg Z amp abcdefg 1 8 Miscellaneous 107 Sheet Feeder ESC EM Data Structure ASCII ESC EM 0 deactivate sheet feeder operation hex 1B 19 30 dec 27 25 48 ASCII ESC EM 1 select magazine 1 front hex 1B 19 31 dec 27 25 49 ASCII ESC EM 2 select magazine 2 rear hex 1B 19 352 dec 27 25 50 ASCII ESC EM 4 activate sheet feeder operation hex 1B 19 34 dec 27 25 51 ASCII ESC EM R eject paper hex 1B 19 52 dec 27 25 82 Description This code sequence should only be used when the sheet feeder is mounted and se lected Parameters for sheet feeder operation set via the control panel are deactivated When sheet feeder operation is activated the paper is fed automatically by a received code FF If the last print position is outside the defined print area the paper will additio nally be fed by codes LF VT or ESC J o The form length must be defined in accordance with the paper format used 108 Miscellaneous Example 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 REM LPRINT LPRINT LPRINT LPRINT LPRINT LPRINT LPRINT END sheet feeder CHRS 27
269. valuates characters following the ESC character to determine if the sequence is valid If the sequence is valid then the printer responds to the command If the sequence is not valid then the printer aborts the process discarding at least the first character following ESC Dec 27 Hex 1B ESC P DEVICE CONTROL STRING DCS The control function introducer for the device control string structure which is used to frame graphics Dec 144 Hex 90 ESC The CSI character is the control function introducer for the ANSI control sequence CSI Control sequences are multi character control functions that accept parameters Dec 155 Hex 9B ESC STRING TERMINATOR ST Terminates the DCS and the OSC sequence Dec 156 Hex 9C ESC The OSC character is the introducer for straps and options OSC Dec 157 Hex 9D BEL BEEPER Dec 7 Hex 07 7265 Programmer s Manual Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 2 ANSI Commands Description DEL DELETE DEL is a printable character or is a valid graphics data byte if received in dot graphics mode Dec 127 Hex 7F ESC p1 p2 lt SP gt SELECT EMULATION If p2 is 0 which is the default then the current settings in the printer remain in effect through the emulation change to the extent that selected features are supported in the target emulation This affects such things as font selection character pitch margins tabs and so forth If p2 is 1 then the status of such p
270. vtabs B CHR 3 CHR 5 CHR 9 CHR 0 tab tab tab line 3 line 5 line 9 Set Reset Vertical Tabs in Channels Select Vertical Tab Channel Data Structure Description ASCII ESC p hex 1B 62 dec 27 98 ASCII ESC p hex 1B 62 dec 27 98 ASCII ESC hex 1B 2F dec 27 47 lt m gt lt m gt lt m gt lt m gt lt m gt lt m gt lt m gt lt m gt lt m gt n42 n46 NUL lt n1 gt lt n16 gt 00 n1 n16 0 NUL 00 0 set vertical tabs in channels o clear all tab settings select vertical tab channel O Up to 16 vertical tabs for one channel m can be set the number of tab channels m ranges from 0 to 7 The value of n given in lines ranges from 1 to 255 Channel 0 can be set via ESC B The default value is m 0 This command is used to select one of the eight vertical tab channels The value of m ranges from O to 7 Print Positioning 57 Example 10 REM vertical tabs in tab channels 20 LPRINT CHRS 27 C CHRS 24 form length 24 lines 30 LPRINT CHRS 27 b CHRS 0 CHRS 2 CHRS 4 CHRS 6 CHRS 0 40 REM Channels 0 tabs set at lines 2 4 and 6 50 LPRINT CHRS 27 b CHRS 1 CHRS 9 CHRS 11 CHRS 14 CHRS 0 60 REM Channel 1 tabs set at lines 9 11 and 14 70 LPRINT CHRS 27 CHRS 0 80 REM Selects channel 0 90 LPRINT Channel 0 100 GOSUB 180 110 LPRINT CHRS 27 CHRS 1 120 REM Selects channel 1 130
271. wledge hex 06 dec 6 Description 0 By sending the positive acknowledge code ACK printer lt host it is possible to transmit a data block to the printer and thus transfer it into the printer s line buffer This code concerns only serial data transfer with ACK NAK protocol For a detailed description see the documentation which comes with your printer Miscellaneous 95 Negative Acknowledge NAK Data Structure Description qp Data Structure ASCII NAK negative acknowledge hex 15 dec 21 By sending the negative acknowledge code NAK a parity error character with the wrong parity is indicated in the data block to be transmitted and then the data block is deleted This code concerns only serial data transfer with ACK NAK protocol For a detailed description see the documentation which comes with your printer Clear Print Buffer CAN ASCII CAN clear print buffer hex 18 dec 24 Description When the printer receives this code the print buffer is completely cleared This code only clears the contents of the print buffer It does not affect any control codes which have previously been sent to the printer 96 Miscellaneous Delete DEL Data Structure ASCII DEL A delete hex 7F dec 127 Description With this code the line buffer is cleared Acoustic Alarm BEL Data Structure ASCII BEL A acoustic alarm hex 07 dec 7 Description This code causes an acoustic alarm Miscellaneous 97 Star
272. y more data In parallel interface if the printer is strapped for select deselect by received DC1 DC3 codes then the host sends DC3 to the printer to set the printer to Standby In Standby the printer will accept and acknowledge data from the interface but will discard all data received Dec 19 Hex 13 ETX ETX ACK COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL In serial interface if the printer is strapped for ETX ACK handshaking then the host sends the ETX control code at the end of a block of data Dec 3 Hex 03 ACK ETX ACK COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL In serial interface if the printer is strapped for ETX ACK handshaking then the printer sends an ACK in response to and ETX from the host to indicate that it is ready to receive more data Dec 6 Hex 06 7265 Programmer s Manual 8 Copyright O 2004 TallyGenicom Chapter 2 ANSI Printer Control Commands Description SO SHIFT OUT You can strap the printer to start either barcode page 37 or oversized page 64 mode whichever is enabled on receipt of SO The ISU status of SO SI control is disabled You can enable SO SI control from Software Options on the printed menu or from the host via the Straps and Options control sequence See page 14 Dec 14 Hex OE Sl SHIFT IN If the printer is strapped to turn on barcode or oversized on receipt of SO then SI turns barcode page 37 or oversized page 64 mode off Dec 15 Hex OF ESC ESCAPE Introduces an escape sequence The printer e

Tally Genicom Matrix Printer User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents